Anda di halaman 1dari 392

StressCheck Software,

Release 5000.1.13
Training Manual
2014 Halliburton

Part Number 161778 Revision H

January 2015

2014 Halliburton
All Rights Reserved
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also protected by
Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or
disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Halliburton | Landmark
10200 Bellaire Blvd., Houston, Texas 77072-5206, USA
P.O. Box 42810, Houston, Texas 77242-2810, USA
Phone: 281.575.3000, Fax: 713.839.2015
Internet: https://www.landmarksoftware.com
Trademarks
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3D Surveillance, 3DFS, 3DView, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, Adaptive Mesh Refining,
ADC, Advanced Data Transfer, Analysis Model Layering, ARIES, ARIES DecisionSuite, Asset Data Mining, Asset Decision Solutions, Asset Development
Center, Asset Development Centre, Asset Journal, Asset Performance, AssetConnect, AssetConnect Enterprise, AssetConnect Enterprise Express,
AssetConnect Expert, AssetDirector, AssetJournal, AssetLink, AssetLink Advisor, AssetLink Director, AssetLink Observer, AssetObserver, AssetObserver
Advisor, AssetOptimizer, AssetPlanner, AssetPredictor, AssetSolver, AssetSolver Online, AssetView, AssetView 2D, AssetView 3D, Barrier Assurance
Monitoring, BLITZPAK, CartoSnap, CasingLife, CasingSeat, CDS Connect, CGMage Builder, Channel Trim, COMPASS, Contract Generation, Corporate
Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, Data Analyzer, DataManager, DataServer, DataStar, DataVera, DBPlot, Decision Management System, DecisionSpace,
DecisionSpace 3D Drill View, DecisionSpace 3D Drill View KM, DecisionSpace AssetLink, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace AssetSolver,
DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace Base Module, DecisionSpace Data Quality, DecisionSpace Desktop, DecisionSpace Dropsite,
DecisionSpace Geoscience, DecisionSpace GIS Module, DecisionSpace GRC Module, DecisionSpace Nexus, DecisionSpace Reservoir, DecisionSuite,
Deeper Knowledge. Broader Understanding., Depth Team, Depth Team Explorer, Depth Team Express, Depth Team Extreme, Depth Team Interpreter,
DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, Desktop Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP,
DEX, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery 3D, Discovery Asset, Discovery Framebuilder, Discovery PowerStation, Discovery Suite, DMS, Drillability Suite,
Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, DrillNET, Drill-to-the-Earth-Model, Drillworks, Drillworks ConnectML, Drillworks Predict, DSS, Dynamic Frameworks to
Fill, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EDM, EDM AutoSync, EDT, eLandmark, Engineers Data Model, Engineers Desktop,
Engineers Link, ENGINEERING NOTES, eNotes, ESP, Event Similarity Prediction, ezFault, ezModel, ezSurface, ezTracker, ezTracker2D, ezValidator,
FastTrack, Field Scenario Planner, FieldPlan, For Production, FrameBuilder, Frameworks to Fill, FZAP!, GeoAtlas, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix
Exploration System, Geologic Interpretation Component, Geometric Kernel, GeoProbe, GeoProbe GF DataServer, GeoSmith, GES, GES97, GesFull,
GESXplorer, GMAplus, GMI Imager, Grid3D, GRIDGENR, H. Clean, Handheld Field Operator, HHFO, High Science Simplified, Horizon Generation, I2
Enterprise, iDIMS, iEnergy, Infrastructure, iNotes, Iso Core, IsoMap, iWellFile, KnowledgeSource, Landmark (as service), Landmark (as software),
Landmark Decision Center, LandNetX, Landscape, Large Model, Lattix, LeaseMap, Limits, LithoTect, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, MagicDesk, Make Great
Decisions, MathPack, MDS Connect, MicroTopology, MIMIC, MIMIC+, Model Builder, NETool, Nexus (as service), Nexus (as software), Nexus View,
Object MP, OneCall, OpenBooks, OpenJournal, OpenLink, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWire Client, OpenWire Server,
OpenWorks, OpenWorks Development Kit, OpenWorks Production, OpenWorks Well File, Operations Management Suite, PAL, Parallel-VIP, Parametric
Modeling, Permedia, Petris WINDS Enterprise, PetrisWINDS, PetroBank, PetroBank Explorer, PetroBank Master Data Store, PetroWorks, PetroWorks Asset,
PetroWorks Pro, PetroWorks ULTRA, PLOT EXPRESS, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PostStack Family,
Power Interpretation, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerExplorer Connect, PowerGrid, PowerHub, PowerModel, PowerView, PrecisionTarget,
Presgraf, PressWorks, PRIZM, Production, Production Asset Manager, PROFILE, Project Administrator, ProMAGIC Connect, ProMAGIC Server, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMax 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX 4D, ProMAX Family, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, Query Builder, Quick, Quick+,
QUICKDIF, Quickwell, Quickwell+, Quiklog, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, RAYMAP+, Real Freedom, Real Time Asset
Management Center, Real Time Decision Center, Real Time Operations Center, Real Time Production Surveillance, Real Time Surveillance, Real-time View,
Recall, Reference Data Manager, Reservoir, Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, Resolve, RTOC, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisMapX,
Seismic Data Check, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks 2D, SeisWorks 3D, SeisWorks PowerCalculator, SeisWorks
PowerJournal, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisWorks PowerView, SeisXchange, Semblance Computation and Analysis, Sierra Family, SigmaView,
SimConnect, SimConvert, SimDataStudio, SimResults, SimResults+, SimResults+3D, SIVA+, SLAM, Smart Change, Smart Deploy, Smart Flow, Smart
Skills, Smart Start, Smart Sustain, Smart Transform, Smart Vision, SmartFlow, smartSECTION, smartSTRAT, Spatializer, SpecDecomp, StrataMap,
StrataModel, StratAmp, StrataSim, StratWorks, StratWorks 3D, StreamCalc, StressCheck, STRUCT, Structure Cube, Surf & Connect, SurfNet, SynTool,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, Tanks & Tubes, TDQ, Team Workspace,
TERAS, T-Grid, The Engineers DeskTop, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs Revenue Interface, TracPlanner, TracPlanner Xpress, Trend Form
Gridding, Trimmed Grid, Tubular Basic, Turbo Synthetics, Unconventional Essentials, VESPA, VESPA+, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIPDataStudio,
VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-THERM, vSpace, vSpace Blueprint, vSpace Onsite, WavX, Web Editor,
Well H. Clean, Well Seismic Fusion, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN, WellSolver, WellXchange, WOW,
Xsection, Youre in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, ZEH, ZEH Plot, ZetaAnalytics, Z-MAP, Z-MAP Plus, and ZPS are trademarks, registered
trademarks, or service marks of Halliburton.
All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are the trademarks or names of their respective owners.

Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Halliburton.
Halliburton assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed
or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Third Party Licenses and Attributions


Halliburton acknowledges that certain third party code has been bundled with, or embedded in, its software. The licensors of this
third party code, and the terms and conditions of their respective licenses, may be found at the following location:

PathNameInInstallationDir/Third_Party.pdf
Disclaimer
The programs and documentation may provide links to external web sites and access to content, products, and services from third
parties. Halliburton is not responsible for the availability of, or any content provided on, third party web sites. You bear all risks
associated with the use of such content. If you choose to purchase any products or services from a third party, the relationship is
directly between you and the third party. Halliburton is not responsible for: (a) the quality of third party products or services; or (b)
fulfilling any of the terms of the agreement with the third party, including delivery of products or services and warranty obligations
related to purchased products or services. Halliburton is not responsible for any loss or damage of any sort that you may incur from
dealing with any third party.

Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
What is the StressCheck Software? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Training Course and Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Casing Design Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Wellbore Temperatures and Casing Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Temperature Deration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Production Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7

Basic Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9


Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Modulus of Elasticity (Youngs Modulus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Yield Strength (Tensile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Pipe Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11


Axial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yield Strength Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plastic Collapse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transition Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elastic Collapse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diameter to Wall Thickness Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect of Tension on Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect of Internal Pressure on Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced Wall vs. Nominal Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-18

Contents

Tension due to Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Triaxial Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20


Von Mises Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Triaxial Design Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Casing Buckling in Oil Field Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

API Connection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25


Preliminary Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Why Should You Do A Preliminary Design?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Data is needed to perform a Preliminary Design? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Casing Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Casing Shoe Setting Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-26
2-26
2-26
2-27

Detailed Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28


Burst Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Production Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collapse Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drilling Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Production Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axial Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running and Cementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Load Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Factor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Line Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-28
2-28
2-36
2-38
2-38
2-41
2-43
2-43
2-46
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-47
2-48
2-48

External Pressure Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50


Mud and Cement Mix-Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permeable Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poor Cement Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poor Cement Enabled High Pressure Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poor Cement EnabledLow Pressure Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Formation Pore Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-50
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54

Contents

TOC Inside Previous Shoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


TOC in Open Hole (with and without Mud Drop Enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pore Pressure w/ Seawater Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Gradients w/ Pore Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mud and Cement Slurry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frac @ Prior Shoe with Gas Gradient Above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shoe/Mud Gradients w/ Pore Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrostatic Isolation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-54
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-59
2-61

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Describing the Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Well Explorer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Working with the Well Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


Drag-and-drop Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Instant Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Well Explorer Node Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Data Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Audit Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Well Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depth Reference Datum(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Tab (Design Properties Dialog Box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depth Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WorkflowHow to Set Up Datums for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How This Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-22
3-22

iii

Contents

Concurrency and Multi-user Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24


SAM in the Application Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAM in the Well Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reload Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-27

Working with Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Chapter 4: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Enter General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Specify Design Parameters for a Casing String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
View Graphical Results and Perform Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5


Starting the StressCheck Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Files and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7


What Type of Files Does the StressCheck Software Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is a Template File? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening an Existing Template File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a Template File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9

Main Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10


Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wellbore Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tubular Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wizard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12

Contents

Data Entry Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13


Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Helpful Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15


Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Plots Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spreadsheets and Tables Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Layout Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depths Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Factors Group Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMS Report Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Unit System Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Convert Unit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Convert Unit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Graphical Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Plot Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Well Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-15
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-24
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-28

Accessing and Managing Pipe Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29


Selecting and Deleting Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Existing Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting a New Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tubular Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Tubular Properties and Password Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing and Exporting Tubular Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Derations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-31
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-40
4-41

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Entering Well Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Creating a New Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Contents

Design Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


Entering General Well Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Field and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Entering Pore Pressure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Pore Pressure Spreadsheet Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Entering Fracture Gradient Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Fracture Gradient Spreadsheet Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Defining a Squeezing Salt/Shale Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Squeezing Salt/Shale Spreadsheet Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Managing Wellpath Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Entering Wellpath Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Import Wellpath File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Dogleg Severity Overrides Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Defining the Geothermal Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Fields and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
What Effect Does Temperature Have on the Analysis? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Define the Casing and Tubing Scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Fields and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Well Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Defining Production Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Fields and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Setting Up Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Splitting Windows into Panes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Splitting the Tab into Vertical Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Splitting the Tab into Horizontal Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Changing the Contents of the Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Entering Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Specifying the Initial Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Defining Cementing and Landing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Defining the Starting Temperature Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Specify Tool Passage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13


Defining Burst Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

vi

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Contents

Selecting the Design Burst Loads and the External Pressure Profile . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the External Pressure Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Burst Load Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multiple tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Associated External Pressure Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Burst Load Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Burst Load Pressure Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Burst Design Load Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-19
6-20
6-22
6-23

Specifying Collapse Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24


Selecting Collapse Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Different External Pressure Profiles for Each Load Case. . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Collapse Load Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Collapse Load Pressure Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collapse Design Load Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-24
6-25
6-25
6-26
6-27

Specifying Axial Loads Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29


Defining Custom Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Displaying the List of Existing Custom Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming a Custom Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Custom Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define the Pressure Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Including the Custom Load in the Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining the Custom Load Temperature Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Pressure Profiles Including the Custom Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-30
6-31
6-31
6-31
6-33
6-33
6-35

Chapter 7: Graphical Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


Performing an Automated Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Burst Design Using the Burst Design Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating a Pipe Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Modifying a Pipe Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Comparing Burst and Collapse Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Checking Collapse Design Using the Collapse Design Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
What is the Collapse Design Load Line? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
What is the Pipe Rating Line? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Adding a Section to Satisfy Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Checking Axial and Service Load Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

vii

Contents

Using the Axial Load Profiles Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Using the Axial Service Load Profiles Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Service Load Lines Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Axial and Triaxial Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Axial Design Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Triaxial Design Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Triaxial Design Limit Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-16
7-18
7-22
7-23

Checking a Specific Casing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24


Compressional Load Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Minimum Cost Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27


Fields and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Number of Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Section Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cost of K-55 Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Cost Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select API and Premium Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Premium Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-27
7-27
7-27
7-27
7-29
7-30
7-32

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Input Data Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Tabular Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Viewing the String Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
What is the Maximum Allowable Wear? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Reporting in the StressCheck Software and Microsoft Word . . . . . . . . . . 8-8


Generating StressCheck Software Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Previewing and Printing StressCheck Software Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Chapter 9: Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


StressCheck Software Exercise Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exercise 1: Reviewing/Creating the Data Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

viii

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Contents

Exercise 2: Preferences and Workspace Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


Exercise 2 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Exercise 3: Reviewing/Specifying General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14


Exercise 3 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Exercise 4: The Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23


Exercise 4 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Exercise 5: Minimum Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53


Exercise 5 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Exercise 6: Analyzing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62


Exercise 6 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64

Exercise 7: Tables and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72


Exercise 7 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74

Exercise 8: Sensitivity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86


Special Pipe Tubular Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Exercise 8 Answers: Special Pipe Tubular Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Taper String Design Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Exercise 8 Answers: Taper String Design Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
High Collapse Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Exercise 8 Answers: High Collapse Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-110

Exercise 9: Independent Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114


Exercise 10: Template Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
Exercise 10 Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

ix

Contents

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 1

Introduction
What is the StressCheck Software?
The Landmark StressCheck software is an extraordinarily powerful
and easy-to-use engineering tool for the design and analysis of casing
strings.
The StressCheck software was developed in cooperation with several
major oil and gas exploration and production companies as one
component of a next-generation system for well engineering. It is based
on casing design principles that are well accepted and broadly employed
in the industry. With the StressCheck software, sophisticated design
methods can be routinely employed to develop minimum-cost,
high-integrity casing design solutions with minimum expenditure of
time and effort.
The StressCheck software can be used to design casing strings that meet
or exceed all relevant design criteria from top to bottom. The
StressCheck software can yield significant savings in total casing costs
by providing a variety of automated formulations for specifying realistic
burst, collapse, and axial loads, rather than traditional worst-case
maximum load profiles, and by optimizing the number and length of
casing string sections. In some cases, as much as 40% can be saved in
comparison to casing designs developed by conventional methods. With
the Custom Loads feature, the StressCheck software also provides an
easy-to-use spreadsheet facility for specifying, in exact detail,
user-defined internal pressure, external pressure, and temperature
profiles when more unique load-case formulations are required.
Experienced engineers who understand the requirements of casing
design developed the StressCheck software with features that facilitate
thorough consideration of more sophisticated design issues. These
issues include:

Running, installation, and service loads, for more comprehensive


axial design

Gas kick loads

External pressure profiles for good and poor cement

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

1-1

Chapter 1: Introduction

Permeable zones

Mud density deterioration

Annulus mud drop

Worst-case or user-entered temperature profiles

Temperature-dependent and pressure-dependent gas-density


profiles

Overpull limits

Allowable wear

Pressure testing

Automated Minimum Cost API or triaxial design

The StressCheck software offers OLE to Microsoft Office


applications such as Word, Excel, and PowerPoint, as well as other
OLE-compliant products. The StressCheck software includes powerful
and flexible unit systems, both standard (API and SI) and user-defined,
which make it easy to customize input and output unit conventions to
suit virtually any international need. The StressCheck software can be
used in combination with the powerful Landmark WELLCAT
package to solve the toughest design problems.

Course Objectives
During this course you should become familiar with:

1-2

Fundamental casing design principles

Equations used to calculate casing ratings

Design criteria and data entry

Casing design and design checks

Documenting and analyzing results

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction

Training Course and Manual Overview


The purpose of this manual is to provide you a reference for entering
data and performing an analysis during the class. Perhaps more
importantly, you can refer to it after the class is over to refresh your
memory concerning analysis steps. This manual contains technical
information concerning the methodology and calculations used to
develop the StressCheck software. If you require more technical
information than what is presented in this manual, please ask
your instructor.
The training course begins with a quick introduction. Following the
introduction, time is spent covering the theory, concepts, and features
used in the StressCheck software.

Licensing
For information regarding Licensing, please refer to the Help >
Engineers Desktop Drilling Summary Level Release Notes >
Licensing.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

1-3

Chapter 1: Introduction

1-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2

Theory, Calculations, and References


This section covers the fundamental theory basis for StressCheck
software calculations and includes the design methodologies considered
for workflows.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-1

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Casing Design Methodology


The following displays a list of StressCheck features in a basic
workflow that follows a casing design methodology.

2-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-3

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Wellbore Temperatures and Casing Design


Temperatures affect casing design in the following ways:

Influence pressure loads (PVT properties of gas)

Decrease the pipe rating (the yield strength is a function


of temperature)

Result in axial thermal growth, which can lead to buckling in


uncemented sections and may require triaxial analysis to determine
combined loading effects

Affect cement slurry design

Result in annular pressure build-up

Influence corrosion

Temperature Deration
A default schedule is provided in the StressCheck software that is based
on a linear deration of 0.03% per degree F.
Temperature

Yield Strength

Fahrenheit (F)

Celsius (C)

Correction Factor

68

20

1.00

122

50

0.983

212

100

0.956

302

150

0.929

392

200

0.902

Wellbore temperatures during drilling, completion, production, and


workover operations can vary considerably from the undisturbed
profile. The StressCheck software uses worst-case estimates by default.
To accurately predict wellbore temperatures, a thermal simulator such
as the WELLCAT software is required.

2-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Drilling Temperatures
For drilling load cases such as a gas kick or lost returns with mud drop,
the profile used to correct the design load line is based on the calculated
API circulating temperature and a straight line drawn through the
midpoint of the user-entered undisturbed temperature profile.

Drilling
Temperature
Profile

Undisturbed
Temperature
Profile

Depth

Mid-point of
Undisturbed
Profile

API
Circulating
Temperature
Temperature

The calculation of the API circulating temperature is generally overconservative. If a more accurate profile is necessary, thermal simulation
using WELLCAT - Drill should be used.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-5

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Production Temperatures
For production load cases such as a tubing leak, the profile used to
correct the design load line is based on maximum undisturbed reservoir
temperature at the perforation depth from TD to the surface.

Depth

Production
Temperature
Profile

Undisturbed
Temperature
Profile

Temperature

This profile is generally over conservative depending on reservoir fluid,


flow rates, and time after initial production. If a more accurate profile is
necessary, thermal simulation using WELLCAT - Prod should be used.

2-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Initial Conditions
The temperature used in the StressCheck software does not necessarily
lead to more conservative design. This data is used to define load cases,
determine the initial state of the casing, and dictate design and
analysis logic.
Surface
Ambient
dT

UNCONSERVATIVE
SCK

StressCheck
Actual

injection temp

production temp

Depth

TOC

Actual
StressCheck
SCK

Temperature
Initial conditions data is defined on a per-string basis; that is, different
initial conditions data can be defined for each string in the Casing
Scheme spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-7

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Surface
Ambient

After WOC

WellCat
StressCheck

injection temp

production temp

Depth

TOC

WellCat
StressCheck

Temperature
The WELLCAT software can simulate a more accurate temperature
profile for both production and injection, which can lead to a less
conservative design criteria.

2-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Basic Material Properties


To define a material, the Youngs Modulus, Poissons Ratio, and density
must be specified. Youngs Modulus (ratio of stress and strain) and
Poissons Ratio (ratio of lateral contraction to elongation) are the two
independent parameters that describe the mechanical behavior of an
elastic material.

Stress

The symbol for stress is:


Stress is defined as: Load / Cross-sectional area
You can compare stress with: Pressure = Force/Area

The symbol for strain is:

Strain is defined as: Change in Length / Initial Length

Strain

or

You can define True Strain as: Ln (Final Length / Initial Length).
True strain accounts for the material volume.

Modulus of Elasticity (Youngs Modulus)


The symbol for Modulus of Elasticity is E .
For any material, E is a constant which relates stress and strain as long
as they are proportional. (that is, a straight line graph).

E =

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-9

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Yield Strength (Tensile)


Yield strength is the stress above which irreversible plastic deformation
occurs.

2-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Pipe Ratings
Axial, Burst, and Collapse loads are factors that directly affect the
performance ratings for the selected pipe or connection. Other factors
that affect pipe ratings include reduced wall thickness and tension due
to bending.

Axial
The axial strength of the pipe body is determined by the pipe body yield
strength formula found in API Bulletin 5C3. Axial strength is the
product of the cross-sectional area and the yield strength. Nominal
dimensions are used.
2
2
F y = --- ( D d )Y p
4
Where:
Fy = pipe body axial strength, lb
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
d = nominal inside diameter, inches

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-11

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Burst
The following equation is commonly called the Barlow Equation and is
applicable to thin wall pipes. It assumes that burst is imminent when the
pipe begins to yield. The factor 0.875 appearing in the equation allows
for minimum acceptable wall thickness due to piercing operations as per
API specification 5CT.

2Y p t
P = 0.875 ----------D
Where:
P = minimum internal yield pressure, lb/in2
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches

Collapse

As per API Bulletin 5C3, collapse criteria consists of four collapse


regimes. These regimes are determined by yield strength and D/t. Most
oil field tubulars experience collapse in the plastic and transition
regimes. Nominal dimensions are used in the collapse equations.
Collapse strength is primarily a function of the materials yield strength
and the D/t ratio. Collapse strength as a function of D/t is shown in the
preceding graphic.

2-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Yield Strength Collapse


Yield strength collapse is based on yield at the inner wall using the Lam
thick wall elastic solution.

(D t) 1
P Y = 2Y p ----------------------2
p
D

--- t
Where:
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
Plastic Collapse
Plastic collapse is based on empirical data from 2,488 tests.

A
P p = Y p ---------- B C
Dt
5

A = 2.8762 + ( 0.10679 10 )Y P + ( 0.21301 10

10

)Y P ( 0.53132 10

16

)Y P

B = 0.026233 + ( 0.50609 10 )Y P
7

13

C = 465.93 + 0.030867Y P + ( 0.10483 10 )Y P ( 0.36989 10

)Y P

Where:
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-13

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Transition Collapse
Transition collapse is a numerical curve fit between the plastic and
elastic regimes.

F
P T = Y p ---------- G
Dt

B 3
3 --A
6
46.95 10 -----------------B
2 + ---
A
F = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2B
3 B
---
3 ---
A
A

B
Y P ------------------ --- 1 ------------------
B A
2 + B
---
2 + ---

A
A
B
G = F --A
Where:
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
(A and B are defined in the section on Plastic Collapse.)

Elastic Collapse
Elastic collapse is based on theoretical elastic collapse. This criteria is
independent of yield strength and applicable to very thin wall pipe.
6

46.95 10
P E = ---------------------------------------------2
(D t)((D t) 1)

2-14

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Where:
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches

Diameter to Wall Thickness Regions


The four API collapse regimes depend on the diameter to wall thickness
(D/t) ratio of the pipe of interest. Therefore:

Yield Collapse
D
D
---- ----
t t YP

Plastic Collapse
D
D
D
---- < ---- ----
t YP t t PT

Transition Collapse
D
D
D
---- < ---- ----
t PT t t TE

Elastic Collapse
D
D
---- > ----
t t TE
Where:
1
--2

D
----
t YP

C
2
( A 2 ) + 8 B + ------ + ( A 2 )

Y P
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------C
2 B + ------

Y P

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-15

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

YP ( A F )
D
----
= ---------------------------------- t PT
C + YP ( B G )
B
2 + --A
D
= ----------------
t TE
B
3 --A
(A, B, C, F, and G are defined in the sections discussing Transition and
Plastic Collapse.)

Effect of Tension on Collapse


The biaxial effect of tension is incorporated in design by reducing the
design rating of the pipe. The reduced yield strength equation is based
on the Hencky-Von Mises maximum strain energy of distortion theory
of yielding or triaxial analysis. In this case, the radial stress is ignored.
This theory only applies to elastic yield failure (the yield collapse
regime), but the reduction is applied to all the collapse regimes. This
tends to be a conservative assumption. The collapse rating is not
increased with compression.

Y pa =

Sa
S a 2
1 0.75 ------ 0.5 ------ Y p
Yp
Y p

Where:
Ypa = yield strength of axial stress equivalent grade, lb/in2
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
Sa = axial stress, tension is positive, lb/in2
Effect of Internal Pressure on Collapse
The biaxial effect of internal pressure (radial stress) is incorporated in
design by increasing the design rating of the pipe. The API chose to
increase the apparent applied collapse pressure instead of including P0
and P1 in the collapse formulations. (They are only a function of P).
For all collapse loads, Pe >= DP

2-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

This relationship can be derived for Hencky-von Mises and Lam, if


higher order terms are ignored.

2
2
P e = P o 1 ---------- P i = P + ---------- P i
D t
Dt
Where:
t = nominal wall thickness, inches
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
Pe = equivalent external pressure, lb/in2
Po = external pressure, lb/in2
Pi = internal pressure, lb/in2
P = Po- Pi
To provide a more intuitive understanding of this relationship, the
equation can be rewritten as:
PeD = PoD - Pid
Where:
d = nominal inside diameter, inches

Pi

Po

P=0

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Pe

2-17

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Reduced Wall vs. Nominal Dimensions

Axial uses nominal dimensions. The piercing process during


manufacture may result in non-uniform wall thickness, but the
cross-sectional area of the pipe will remain constant. The equation used
in API Bulletin 5C3 to define the axial rating is based on the product of
the cross-sectional area and the yield strength.
Burst uses minimum section. This represents a permissible 12.5% wall
loss due to acceptable tolerances in the piercing and rolling process of
manufacturing seamless pipe. (API Spec. 5CT).
Collapse uses nominal dimensions. The API formula for plastic,
transition, and elastic collapse have been adjusted using regression
analysis to account for API tolerances. No adjustment has been made in
the yield strength collapse regime.

2-18

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Tension due to Bending


Bending loads are superimposed onto the axial load distribution as a
local effect. The bending load formulation is included in all axial load
cases. Bending force is a convenient representation for design.
Bending stress is a function of the local radius of curvature in the
string component.
Stress at the pipes outer diameter due to bending can be expressed as:

ED
bending = -------2r
Where:
bending = stress at the pipes outer surface
E = elastic modulus
D = nominal outside diameter
r = radius of curvature
Expressed as a force in English units, this can be simplified to:
Fbending = 7.272 x 10-6EDAs
Where:
Fbending = bending force, lb
= dogleg severity (o/100 ft)
D = nominal outside diameter, inches
As = cross-sectional area, in2
E = Youngs Modulus, lb/in2
For steel pipe where E = 30 x 10-6 lb/in2, then:
Fbending = 2186DAs

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-19

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Triaxial Stress Analysis


Triaxial stress is not a true stress. It is a way of comparing a generalized
three-dimensional stress state to an uniaxial failure criteria (the yield
strength). The triaxial stress is often called the von Mises equivalent
(VME) stress.
If the triaxial stress exceeds the yield strength, a yield failure is
indicated. The triaxial safety factor is the ratio of the materials yield
strength to the triaxial stress.

Von Mises Equation


2
2
2 12
1
Y p VME = ------- [ ( z ) + ( r ) + ( r z ) ]
2
Where:
Yp = minimum yield strength of the pipe, lb/in2
VME = triaxial stress
z = axial stress
= tangential or hoop stress
r = radial stress

2-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Triaxial Design Ellipse


Plotting the loads on this ellipse allows a direct comparison of the
triaxial criteria with the API ratings. Loads that fall within the design
envelope meet the design criteria.

Region of non-conservative
uniaxial design

Region of more efficient


design

Triaxial limit not applicable in


Collapse region

Combined compression and burst loading corresponds to the upper left


quadrant of the design envelope. This region is where triaxial analysis is
most critical because reliance on the uniaxial criteria alone would not
predict several possible failures.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-21

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Combined tension and burst loading corresponds to the upper right


quadrant of the design envelope. This region is where reliance on the
uniaxial criteria alone may result in a design which is more conservative
than necessary.
For most pipes used in the oilfield, collapse is an instability failure
independent of material yield. The triaxial criteria is based on elastic
behavior and the yield strength of the material and hence, should not be
used with collapse loads. The one exception is for thick wall pipes with
a low D/t ratio, which have an API rating in the yield strength collapse
region. This collapse criteria along with the effects of tension and
internal pressure (which are triaxial effects) result in the API criteria
being essentially identical to the triaxial method in the lower right
quadrant of the triaxial ellipse for thick wall pipes.
For high compression and moderate collapse loads experienced in the
lower left quadrant of the design envelope, the failure mode is
permanent corkscrewing due to helical buckling. It is appropriate to use
the triaxial criteria in this case.

2-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Buckling
All service loads should be evaluated for changes in the axial load
profile, triaxial stress, pipe movement, and the onset and degree of
buckling. Buckling will occur if the buckling force, Fbuckling, is greater
than a threshold force, Fp, known as the Paslay buckling force.

F buckling = F a + p i A i p o A o
Where:
Fa = actual axial force (tension positive)
pi = internal pressure
po= external pressure

Fp =

4w ( sin ) ( ( EI ) r )

Where:
w = distributed buoyed weight of casing
= hole angle
EI = pipe bending stiffness
r = radial annular clearance

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-23

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Casing Buckling in Oil Field Operations


Buckling should be avoided in drilling operations to minimize casing
wear. Buckling can be reduced or eliminated by:

Applying a pickup force after cementation before landing the casing

Holding pressure while WOC (Wait-on-Cement) to pre-tension the


string (subsea wells)

Raising the top of cement

Using centralizers

Increasing pipe stiffness

In production operations, casing buckling is not normally a critical


design issue. However, a large amount of buckling can occur due to
increased production temperatures in some wells. A check should be
made to ensure that plastic deformation or corkscrewing will not occur.
This check is possible by using triaxial analysis and including the
bending stress due to buckling.
In high temperature applications, the intermediate and surface casings
should also be checked for possible buckling occurring.
Permanent corkscrewing will only occur if the triaxial stress exceeds the
yield strength of the material.

2-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

API Connection Ratings


Connection ratings for 8 round (STC and LTC) and buttress (BTC)
casing connections are based on four failure criteria given in API
Bulletin 5C3:

Burst (Internal Yield) - The internal pressure which will initiate


yield at the root of the coupling based on connection geometry and
yield strength.

Leak - The internal pressure which exceeds the contact pressure


between the connections seal flanks.

Fracture - The axial force which causes either the pin or coupling
to fracture based on the ultimate tensile strength. This is not
consistent with the pipe body axial strength, which is based on yield
strength.

Jump Out - The axial force at which an 8 round pin jumps or


pulls out of the box without fracturing. This criteria only applies
to STC and LTC connections.

The StressCheck software always reports the minimum safety factor


based on pipe body or connection. If the connection is limiting the
design, then the criteria with which the API connection fails will be
presented.
This does not indicate that the connection is failing to meet the failure
criteria, but purely that it is the limiting part on the tubular. An example
of a string summary is shown below:
Production Casing

Burst

Collapse

Axial

Triaxial

9 5/8, 47.00, N-80


STC

1.47

2.61

1.45J

1.48

9 5/8, 53.50, N-80


LTC

1.77

1.68

2.13J

1.61

9 5/8, 58.40, P-110


BTC

2.18L

1.28

5.03

1.80

L: Leak
J: Jump Out

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-25

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Preliminary Design
The largest opportunity for cost savings can be achieved during this
stage of the well design. Preliminary design includes:

Data gathering and interpretation


Determination of shoe depths and number of casing strings
Selection of hole and casing sizes
Mud weight and top of cement (TOC) design

Why Should You Do A Preliminary Design?


The Landmark CasingSeat software can offer the drilling engineer a
selection of optimal casing ODs and setting depths based on geological,
lithological properties and various drilling operations conditions.

The design can be used as input data for detailed design (cannot yet
order casings).
Maximum savings are achievable at this stage.
Standard designs (received wisdom) can be challenged.

What Data is needed to perform a Preliminary Design?

Number of casing strings


Pipe diameters
Hole sizes
Shoe and hanger depths
Cement tops and mud program

Minimum Casing Diameter


Driven by well operational requirements:

2-26

Required well configuration


Reservoir description
Completion design
Tubing size
Minimum production casing/liner

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Minimum Casing Shoe Setting Depth

Isolate overlying unstable formations


Isolate overlying shallow hydrocarbons
Isolate overlying lost circulation (thief) zones
Isolate overlying fresh water horizons
Prevent failure of formations by induced circulating pressures
during drilling operations
Prevent failure of formations by induced circulating pressures
during well control when closing in and circulating out an influx

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-27

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Detailed Mechanical Design


Design loads represent the worst case loads that a particular casing
string could experience during the life of a well.

Burst Loads
Drilling Loads

Displacement to Gas
This drilling load case models displacement of the drilling mud in the
casing by gas. It applies only to burst design.
Gas
Gradient

Limit load
case by the
fracture
pressure at
the shoe.
Fracture
pressure at the
shoe.
Pore
Pressure
Internal Casing Pressure

2-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Influx depth

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

By default, the gas column extends from the shoe depth (above open
hole TD) to the wellhead, but you can specify the depth of a gas/mud
interface, where the mud column is on top of the gas column. This load
case represents a shut-in condition following a large kick. It is
commonly used as a worst-case burst criterion for protective
(intermediate) and surface casing. It is sometimes described as the
maximum anticipated surface pressure, or MASP. Load and the
load-case formulation is consistent with so-called maximum load
casing design principles.
The internal pressure profile is based on a mud density, a gas gradient,
and the pore pressure at the influx depth. It is normally constrained by
the fracture pressure at the shoe above the open hole TD. If you do not
want to limit the internal pressure to the fracture pressure at the shoe,
deselect the Limit to Fracture Shoe check box in the Tabular >
Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab.

Gas Kick Profile


This drilling load case creates an internal pressure profile that simulates
the maximum pressures imposed on the current string while circulating
a gas kick to the surface. This limited kick burst criterion is less
conservative than the full Displacement to Gas load case. It applies only
to burst design.

The internal pressure profile is determined based on specification of a


kick volume and intensity at a kick depth, where kick intensity is the
difference between the EMW for the kicking interval and the mud
density in the open hole interval from whence the gas kick evolves. It is

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-29

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

normally constrained by the fracture pressure at the shoe above the open
hole TD. If you do not want to limit the internal pressure to the fracture
pressure at the shoe, deselect the Limit to Fracture at Shoe check box
in the Tabular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab.

Fracture @Shoe w/ Gas Gradient Above


This drilling load case applies only to burst design and commonly used
as a worst-case burst criterion for protective (intermediate) and surface
casing. This drilling load case models a shut-in well, after taking a large
kick, where the formation fracture pressure at the shoe depth for the
string above the open hole interval from whence the kick evolves is
exceeded, and the mud in the casing is completely displaced by gas. The
internal pressure profile is based on a gas gradient and the fracture
pressure at the shoe above the open hole TD. This load case is very
similar to the Displacement to Gas load case, except that pressure at the
shoe above the open hole TD is always controlled by the fracture
pressure. The Displacement to Gas load case is normally only controlled
by fracture pressure if the calculated pressure at the shoe above the open
hole TD exceeds the fracture pressure.

Fracture @ Shoe w/ 1/3 BHP at Surface


This drilling load case applies only to burst design where drilling load
case models a shut-in well, after taking a kick, where the formation
fracture pressure at the shoe depth for the string above the open hole
interval from whence the kick evolves is exceeded. The pressure at the
surface is taken to be equal to 1/3 of the pore pressure at the open hole
TD. This construct for burst design is based on observation in the Gulf
of Mexico that pressures greater than 1/3 bottom hole pressure (BHP)
are infrequently seen at the surface. The internal pressure profile for the
load case is linear between the surface pressure and fracture @ shoe

2-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

boundary conditions. This load case is less conservative than the


Displacement to Gas and Fracture @ Shoe w/Gas Gradient Above load
cases.

Lost Returns with Water


This drilling load case models a condition of partial or full loss of
subsurface well control where, following a kick event and consequential
loss of circulation at the shoe above the open hole TD, water is displaced
down the casing-drillstring annulus in an attempt to avoid further
deterioration of hydrostatic well control, to a condition of frac @ shoe
and water to surface, by maintaining the highest-possible fluid level in
the annulus. It applies only to burst design.

The internal pressure profile is determined from the fracture pressure at


the shoe above the open hole TD, and water in the annulus.

Surface Protection (BOP)


This drilling load case is used as a criterion for the design of surface
pressure control (BOP) equipment and the upper portion of the casing
and applies only to burst design of casing strings (not available for
liners). The Surface Protection (BOP) load case is based on full
displacement to gas, with a surface boundary condition equal to the
surface pressure that would result from fracture pressure at the shoe
above the deepest open hole interval for which the current string is
exposed to drilling loads and a seawater gradient back to surface (that is,
the default construct for the Lost Returns with Water load case). This
load case develops relatively high design pressures at shallow depths,
but is less conservative than Lost Returns with Water or Displacement
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-31

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

to Gas while providing a more conservative design pressure at shallow


depths than that which would obtain from the Gas Kick Profile load
case. Casing designed using the Surface Protection (BOP) burst
criterion would be expected to incur a ductile burst failure deep in the
string before a shallow failure would occur. The internal pressure profile
is computed from the fracture pressure at the shoe above the open hole
TD, seawater density, and gas density (deriving from either gas gravity
or gas gradient).

Pressure Test
This drilling load case generates an internal pressure profile based on
mud density, applied pressure at the wellhead, and an option for
specifying a plug depth other than the shoe depth for the current string.
If an alternative plug depth is specified, the applied pressure is only seen
above that depth. This load case applies only to burst design.

Green Cement Pressure Test


This drilling load case models an internal pressure test immediately after
bumping the plug during a single-stage primary cementing. The cement,
still acting as a fluid, does not yet serve as a constraint over the cemented
interval against casing-string length changes due to the combination of
piston and Poisson effects. This load case is available for both burst and
axial design, and can be selected in both the Tabular > Burst Loads
and Tabular > Axial Loads dialog boxes. To consider Green Cement
Pressure Test as a load for axial design, the load case must be selected
in the Tabular > Axial Loads > Select tab.
This load case formulation includes a particular external pressure profile
that is used irrespective of the external pressure profile selected on the
Select tab, and irrespective of whether or not the Single External

2-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Pressure Profile check box is marked in the Tabular > Design


Parameters Analysis Options tab for the current string.
The values specified on the Tabular > Initial Conditions > Cementing
and Landing tab are used to construct the external and internal pressure
profiles that arise from fluid hydrostatics alone. The specified test
pressure is applied down to the float collar depth (also specified on the
Tabular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab).
A Green Cement Pressure Test is often performed to save operational
time and to prevent the formation of a micro-annulus caused by applying
a high-test pressure after the cement has hardened. This load case can
also be used to increase the cemented-and-landed hang-off tension of
casing landed with mandrel-type hanger systems (for example, in subsea
wellheads), where the application of a pickup load prior to setting of
slips is not feasible. In such cases, the test pressure must be maintained
until the cement has developed sufficient compressive and bond
strength to resist relaxation of test-pressureinduced axial strains on
test-pressure release.
Selecting this load case and specifying a test pressure generates the axial
load distribution that develops, with the casing at the current-string shoe
depth specified in the Casing Scheme spreadsheet, immediately after
completing the cement job (top plug landed and cement still a fluid) and
on applying a surface pressure.
Since the casing string is not yet constrained from movement over the
cemented length by hardened cement, the piston force resulting from the
test pressure acting on the top plug causes a significant increase in the
axial load.
The following factors are considered:

The specified test pressure, applied to the inside of the casing and
acting on a cross-sectional area corresponding to the casing ID at
the float collar depth, which is specified on the Tabular > Initial
Conditions Cementing and Landing tab of the Initial Conditions
dialog box.

The buoyed weight of the casing, based on the mud at shoe value
specified for the current string on the Casing Scheme spreadsheet,
and the displacement and cement slurry densities specified on the
Tabular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-33

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Wellbore inclination, which will only be considered if the Deviated


check box is marked on the Wellbore > General > Options tab and
a valid well trajectory is defined in the Wellpath Editor spreadsheet.

Any bending-related axial pseudo-loads due to dogleg severities


defined in the Wellpath Editor or Dogleg Severity Overrides
spreadsheets. These loads are superimposed on the axial load
distribution as a local effect using the formulation presented in the
Running in Hole load case description.

Drill Ahead
This drilling load case captures temperature profile and updated internal
mud density for various string types. This load case will represent mud
weight up / mud weight down after casing landing for drilling a new hole
section. This particular load is required for strings that are not fully
cemented in order to quantify how much buckling would occur on the
uncemented section (prevents casing wear). This case can be used for
any string except the last string (exception is protective casing or liner).
Selecting this load case to visualize internal pressure profile which is
defined with the heaviest mud weight used to drill the next hole section
while the drill string is inside the current casing string, plus an ECD
(Equivalent Circulating Density) value.

Gas Over Mud Ratio


This drilling load case illustrates the ratio of well control gas to drilling
mud. This is a burst load case that is enabled for all casing strings
associated to a next open hole section. The Gas Over Mud Ratio load
case allows a user to define the gas over mud interface based on a
wellbore fluid column occupied by drilling fluid, expressed as a fraction
of the greatest open-hole TVD, measured from RKB (Rotary Kelly
Bushing) or the hanger depth, to which the string is exposed to drilling
loads.

2-34

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The internal pressure profile is based on mud density, a gas gradient,


fracture pressure at shoe, fracture pressure margin, gas over mud ratio,
gas/mud interface depth and the pore pressure at the influx depth (the
default influx depth is the TD of the deepest open hole section
associated to the string of interest). The gas property shall be defined
based on gradient or gravity. This load case temperature profile (drilling
temperature profile) is used as the basis for determining a temperature
and pressure dependent gas compressibility factor using a modified
Redlich-Kwong cubic equation of state, the internal pressure profile can
(or may not be) contained by the deepest fracture at shoe of the current
string or string associated to the current string.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-35

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Production Loads

Tubing Leak
This production load case applies only to burst design and models a
surface pressure applied to the top of the production annulus as a
consequence of a tubing leak near the wellhead. The internal pressure
profile is based on produced (reservoir) fluid gravity (gas), or gradient
(gas/oil) and reservoir pressure data (that is, pore pressure at the
perforation depth specified in the Production Data dialog box).

Above the production packer, for which the depth is specified in the
Production Data dialog box, the internal pressure profile is based on a
surface pressure equal to the reservoir pressure minus the produced
fluids hydrostatic pressure (from wellhead to perforation depth) applied
to a packer fluid density entered in the Production Data dialog box.
From the production packer down to the perforation depth, the internal
pressure profile corresponds to that which would develop for full
displacement of this section to the produced fluid (that is, reservoir
pressure minus the produced fluid hydrostatic pressure from packer to
perforation depth). From the perforation depth down to the well TD, the
internal pressure profile is based on reservoir pressure applied to the
selected packer fluid density.

2-36

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Stimulation Surface Leak


This production load case applies only to burst design and models an
injection pressure applied to the top of the production annulus as a
consequence of a tubing leak near the wellhead during injection.

The internal pressure profile is based on produced (reservoir) fluid


gravity (gas) or gradient (gas/oil) and injection pressure data.
Above the production packer, for which the depth is specified in the
Production Data dialog box, the internal pressure profile is based on a
wellhead injection pressure specified on the Tubular > Burst Loads >
Edit tab. It is applied to a packer fluid density entered in the Production
Data dialog box. Below the production packer, the internal pressure
profile corresponds to that which would develop for the wellhead
injection pressure and wellhead-to-shoe displacement to the injection
fluid.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-37

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Injection Down Casing


This production load case models the internal pressure profile resulting
from an injection operation down the casing. Frictional pressure losses
are ignored. It applies only to burst design.

Gas Migration
This production load case models the effect of a gas bubble migrating
upward in the annulus between the production casing and the protective
casing. The gas is constrained against expansion as it rises unless the
fracture pressure at the shoe for the protective casing is exceeded, and
the gas bubble pressure and volume remain unchanged with upward
migration. This load case applies only for burst design, and is only
available for strings of name-type Protective and type Casing or
Tieback. This gas bubble inversion results in reservoir pressure at
the wellhead and can occur in a subsea completion where the outer
annuli are permanently sealed at the wellhead. Gas migration behind
production casing is normally as a result of primary cementing failure.

Collapse Loads
Drilling Loads

Full/ Partial Evacuation


This load case should be considered if drilling with air or foam. It may
also be considered for conductor or surface casing where shallow gas is
encountered. This load case would represent all of the mud being

2-38

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

displaced out of the wellbore (through the diverter) before the formation
bridged off.

Lost Returns with Mud Drop


This drilling load case models evacuation of the casing due to lost
circulation. It applies only to collapse design.

The internal pressure profile corresponds to a mud drop that can occur
due to drilling below the shoe. This mud drop is calculated by assuming
the hydrostatic column of mud in the hole equilibrates with a specified
pore pressure at a specified depth.
The default depth corresponds to the depth with a pore pressure resulting
in the lowest EMW in the open hole section. For prospects where there
is uncertainty about the pore pressure profile, a seawater or normal
pressure gradient is often used to calculate the mud drop depth.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-39

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Cementing
The external pressure profile for this drilling load case is self-described,
modeling the differential pressure due to the higher lead and tail cement
slurry densities on the outside of the casing, from the top of cement
(TOC) to the shoe, immediately after the cement is displaced. It is
unaffected by external pressure profile selections made on the Tubular
> Collapse Loads > Select tab. This load case applies only to collapse
design.

If a displacement fluid is used that has a lesser density than the current-string
value for Mud at Shoe in the Casing Scheme spreadsheet (for example,
seawater), the addition to collapse loading is considered both above and below
the top of cement (TOC).

Drill Ahead
The Drill Ahead load case is explained earlier. (Drill Ahead on
page 2-34)

Collapse Well Containment Screening Tool (WCST)


This load case should be considered to determine if a well can be
contained via a capping stack in the event of a worst case discharge
scenario. The capping stack helps in bringing a well under control in
case of a blowout. It is essentially a lighter, specialized version of a
blowout preventer that uses similar components to stop or control the
flow of oil and gas. The Collapse (WCST) load case applies to collapse
design and is specified in the Tabular > Collapse Loads > Select tab.
Loads Collapse (WCST) option must be checked to obtain a permit to
drill in the Gulf of Mexico deep-water scenarios.

2-40

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Production Loads

Full Evacuation
This production load case models total evacuation of the casing due to
the complete loss of workover or packer fluid into the formation, a large
drawdown of a low permeability or low pressure production zone, or gas
lift operations. It applies only to collapse design.

The internal pressure profile corresponds to an air column whose


density profile is calculated with a temperature-dependent and
pressure-dependent compressibility factor. Despite the similarity of this
load case to the Full/Partial Evacuation drilling collapse load case, it is
included to account for worst-case production temperature effects.

Above/Below Packer
This production load case represents a combination of internal pressure
profiles above and below the packer that can occur during different
operations. It applies only to collapse design.
Above the packer during production, it is assumed that the casing will
never see the fully evacuated pressures that can occur below the packer
because the production annulus is never in pressure communication
with the open perforations. In this case, the internal pressure profile
consists of a hydrostatic gradient due to the packer fluid density above
the packer and a fully evacuated profile below.
However, during completion or workover operations where the
workover or packer fluid is exposed to a depleted zone, a fluid drop may
occur corresponding to the hydrostatic head of the fluid equilibrating
with the depleted pressure at the perforations.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-41

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

This second scenario is modeled by specifying a reduced pressure at the


perforations and enabling the fluid drop above packer.
This load case uses the worst-case collapse pressures from both
scenarios (that is, a partial evacuation above the packer and full
evacuation below) and represents a less severe alternative to a
full evacuation.

Gas Migration
Unlike the burst version of this production load case, the collapse
version uses a self-described external pressure profile regardless of
which external pressure profile was specified on the Tabular >
Collapse Loads > Select tab, and irrespective of whether or not the
Single External Pressure Profile check box was marked. This load
case applies only to collapse design. It is only enabled for strings whose
Casing Scheme spreadsheet reads Production in the Name cell and
either Casing or Tieback in the Type cell. An analogous load case
applies to burst design.
This load case models a gas bubble migrating upward in the annulus
behind the production casing. Since the bubble is not allowed to expand
unless the fracture pressure at the previous casing's shoe is exceeded
(that is, the pressure is not bled off at the wellhead), the bubble's
pressure and volume do not change as it migrates upward.
This gas bubble inversion results in reservoir pressure at the wellhead
and can occur in a subsea completion where the outer annuli are
permanently sealed at the wellhead, allowing the operator no means to
monitor or relieve pressure. Gas migration is normally caused by
channels in the cement between the production casing and a permeable
reservoir.
The internal pressure profile is based on the packer fluid density. The
external pressure profile corresponds to the reservoir pressure applied at
the casing hanger depth to the annulus fluid hydrostatic head, but limited
to the fracture pressure at the prior shoe. If you do not want to limit the
internal pressure to the fracture pressure at the shoe, you can disable the
Limit to Fracture at the Shoe option.

2-42

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Axial Loads
Running and Cementing

Running in Hole - Avg. Speed


This axial load profile does not represent a load distribution seen by the
pipe at one particular time. Instead, it is constructed by calculating the
maximum tension seen at each point on the casing string while running
the casing in the hole.
The maximum tension experienced by a joint of casing is normally the
tension when picking up out of the slips immediately after making up
the joint. The assigned axial pseudo-load arising from dogleg-induced
bending stress can cause the maximum tension to occur at depths where
local well curvature (dogleg severity) was defined in either the Survey
Editor or Dogleg Severity Overrides spreadsheets. The following
factors are considered:

The buoyed weight of the casing, based on the Mud at Shoe value
specified for the current string on the Wellbore > Casing and
Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

The wellbore inclination if a valid well trajectory was defined in the


Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet.

Any bending-related axial pseudo-loads due to dogleg severities


defined in the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor or Wellbore > Dogleg
Severity Overrides spreadsheets. These loads are superimposed on
the axial load distribution as a local effect.

Overpull Force
Selecting this load case and specifying an overpull force generates an
axial load profile that reflects this incremental force above the current
hookload when running the casing string in the hole.
Like the Running in Hole load profile, this axial load profile does not
represent a load distribution seen by the pipe at one particular time while
running the pipe (that is, the overpull force is not just applied when the
casing is on bottom). Instead, the case is considered at each stage of the
running operation (that is, with the casing shoe at a range of depths from
the surface to the setting depth).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-43

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The load profile is constructed by using the maximum force seen at each
point on the pipe during the entire running operation.
If overpull force is not specified, this case is identical to the Running
Load case with no shock loads. The following factors are considered:

The overpull force is applied at the surface, with the stuck point
always assumed to be the bottom of the string.

The buoyed weight of the casing, based on the Mud at Shoe value
specified for the current string on the Wellbore > Casing and
Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

Wellbore inclination if a valid well trajectory was defined in the


Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet.

Any bending-related axial pseudo-loads due to dogleg severities


defined in the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor or Wellbore > Dogleg
Severity Overrides spreadsheets. These loads are superimposed on
the axial load distribution as a local effect using the formulation
presented in the Running in Hole load case description.

If an alternate axial design factor is specified on the Tubular > Axial


Loads > Options tab, this design factor is also used as the criterion for
determining the allowable overpull as a function of depth presented in
the View > Tabular Results > Maximum Allowable Overpull table.

Pre-Cement Static Load


This load case generates the buoyed axial load distribution with the
casing at the current-string shoe depth specified in the Casing Scheme
spreadsheet, just prior to performing the cement job.
The following factors are considered:

2-44

The buoyed weight of the casing, based on the mud at shoe value
specified for the current string on the Casing Scheme spreadsheet.

A force in addition to casing buoyed weight applied at the surface


over the entire string length. For this axial load case, the applied
surface force must be a pickup (positive) force.

Wellbore inclination, which is only considered if the Deviated


check box is marked on the Wellbore > General > Options tab and
a valid well trajectory is defined in the Wellpath Editor spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Any bending-related axial pseudo-loads due to dogleg severities


defined in the Wellpath Editor or Dogleg Severity Overrides
spreadsheets. These loads are superimposed on the axial load
distribution as a local effect using the formulation presented in the
Running in Hole load case description.
Note
The applied force as defined in this 6 for Pre-Cemented Static Load is applied prior
to performing the cement job from the surface to the bottom of the string. It is
independent of the pickup force specified in the Cementing and Landing tab,
which is only considered in axial design when Service Loads is selected on the
Axial Loads > Select tab. Pickup force in the Cementing and Landing tab
represents an incremental upward force (above static string weight) applied at the
surface after the cement has hardened, and results in increased tension above the
TOC depth.

Similarly, the applied force as defined in this dialog box for Pre-Cement
Static Load is independent of the slackoff force landing data in the
Cementing and Landing tab, which is only considered in axial design
where Service Loads is selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select
tab. Slackoff force landing data in the Tubular > Initial Conditions >
Cementing and Landing tab represents a reduction to the current string
axial load profile (immediately after cementing) by lowering of the
casing before landing in the wellhead assembly. This force results in
reduced tension both above and below the TOC depth as specified for
the current string in the Casing Scheme spreadsheet.

Post-Cement Static Load)


This load case generates the buoyed axial load distribution with the
casing at the current-string Shoe depth specified in the Wellbore >
Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet, immediately after performing
the cement job.

Green Cement Pressure Test


The Green Cement Pressure Test is explained earlier. (Green Cement
Pressure Test on page 2-32)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-45

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Service Loads

Ballooning / Reverse Ballooning due to burst / collapse loading


Service Loads models axial loads caused by in-service drilling and
production burst and collapse loads (selected on the Tubular > Burst
Loads > Select tab and Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select tab) that
occur after the casing string is cemented in place.

Load Lines
A single load line of maximum burst and collapse differential pressures
is generated. A burst load line example is shown below. It is formed
from two load cases used as burst criteria.

Automatic Load Generation


The StressCheck software calculates internal pressure profiles based on
the user input. A common external pressure is also selected and
calculated, which provides the StressCheck software with a set of
differential pressures.
For each load:
Internal Pressure External Pressure = Differential Pressure
In the preceding example, two burst loads have been selected and
differential pressure has been calculated. The upper section of the casing

2-46

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

design is driven by the Displacement to Gas load and the bottom by the
Tubing Leak load.
A load line is then compiled of the maximum differential pressure at any
depth. In this case, the load line will be made up of both load cases.

Design Factors
To make a direct graphical comparison between the load line and the
pipes rating line, the design factor must be considered.
Design Factor = Minimum Acceptable Safety Factor.

PipeRating
DF = SF min SF = ---------------------------------AppliedLoad
Where:
DF = Design factor (the minimum acceptable safety factor)
SF = Absolute safety factor

Design Factor Selection


Design factor selection is inextricably linked to the design method.

The more conservative the design assumptions, the lower the design
factor may be to result in the same level of risk.

The higher the load uncertainty, the greater the design factor (for
example, all else being equal, exploration wells should be designed
using higher design factors than development wells).

The three most important aspects of the design method that will have a
direct effect on the appropriate design factor value are:

Selection of load cases and the assumptions used with the load
cases (for example, use of a limited kick criterion vs. a full
displacement to gas, the kick volume and intensity used, whether
bending due to doglegs or shock loads are considered, and so on).

The assumptions used to calculate the pipes load resistance or


rating (for example, whether a nominal or minimum wall section is

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-47

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

used and whether yield stress is derated as a function


of temperature).

How wear and corrosion are considered in the design.

Graphical Design

Multiplying the actual load line


by the burst design factor
results in the design load line.

The burst rating of 9 5/8


40 lbm/ft N80 pipe exceeds
the burst load line at all
depths. Hence, the burst
design criteria has been
satisfied for the
production casing.

Load Line Corrections


Normally, you derate the casing rating by the Design Factor:
Maximum Allowable Load = Design Pipe Rating / Design Factor
Similarly, you can increase the load, which is how the StressCheck
software handles it:
Minimum Design Rating = Design Load x Design Factor
Apart from the design factor, two other effects which impact the design
can be considered in graphical casing design by increasing the load line:

2-48

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The reduction of collapse strength due to tension (a biaxial effect).


The load line is increased as a function of depth by the ratio of the
uniaxial collapse strength to the reduced strength.

The deration of material yield strength due to temperature. Like the


effect of tension on collapse, the load line is increased by the ratio
of the standard rating to the reduced rating.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-49

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

External Pressure Profiles


Mud and Cement Mix-Water

The Mud and Cement Mix-Water external pressure profile is based on


the mud density (current-string Mud at Shoe value in the
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet) from the hanger
to the top of cement (TOC), and the cement mix-water density (from
current-string Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and
Landing tab) from the top of cement (TOC) to the shoe.

2-50

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Permeable Zones
Poor Cement Disabled

This external pressure profile is based on the permeable zones data in


the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, mud density (current-string
Mud at Shoe value in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet), top of cement (TOC), and the cement mix-water density
(from the current-string Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing
and Landing tab). To use this profile assuming the cement job is good,
do not select the Poor Cement check box on the Tubular > Burst
Loads > Edit or the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Edit tabs for external
profile).
The permeable zones considered in this external pressure profile
formulation are those that lie between the shoe depths for the current and
prior strings. If, in the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, no
permeable zones are specified within this interval, the Permeable Zones
profile is identical to the Mud and Cement Mix-Water profile. For a

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-51

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

more detailed explanation of this external pressure profile, review the


Mud and Cement Mix-Water on page 2-50.

Poor Cement Enabled High Pressure Zone

This external pressure profile is based on the permeable zones data in


the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, mud density (current-string
Mud at Shoe value in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet), top of cement (TOC), and the cement mix-water density
(from the current-string Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing
and Landing tab). To use this profile assuming the cement job is poor,
select the Poor Cement check box on the Tubular > Burst Loads >
Edit or the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Edit tabs for external profile).
This profile is used when the permeable zones have a higher pressure
than the surrounding formations.
The permeable zones considered in this external pressure profile
formulation are those that lie between the shoe depths for the current and
prior strings. If, in the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, no

2-52

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

permeable zones are specified within this interval, the Permeable Zones
profile is identical to the Mud and Cement Mix-Water profile. For a
more detailed explanation of this external pressure profile, review Mud
and Cement Mix-Water on page 2-50.

Poor Cement EnabledLow Pressure Zone

This external pressure profile is based on the permeable zones data in


the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, mud density (current-string
Mud at Shoe value in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet), top of cement (TOC), and the cement mix-water density
(from the current-string Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing
and Landing tab). To use this profile assuming the cement job is poor,
select the Poor Cement check box on the Tubular > Burst Loads >
Edit, or the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Edit tabs for external profile).
This profile is used when the permeable zones have a lower pressure
than the surrounding formations.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-53

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The permeable zones considered in this external pressure profile


formulation are those that lie between the shoe depths for the current and
prior strings. If, in the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, no
permeable zones are specified within this interval, the Permeable Zones
profile is identical to the Mud and Cement Mix-Water profile. For a
more detailed explanation of this external pressure profile, review Mud
and Cement Mix-Water on page 2-50.

Minimum Formation Pore Pressure


TOC Inside Previous Shoe
This external pressure profile is based on the pore pressure profile
specified on the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, mud density,
top of cement (TOC), and cement mix-water density. To use this profile,
the top of cement (TOC) must be inside the previous casing. This profile
is only available as a burst criterion for casing strings (not liners).

2-54

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The Minimum Formation Pore Pressure external profile always uses a


pressure profile reflecting the EMW corresponding to the minimum
pore pressure gradient in the open hole interval (that is, the interval
below the prior shoe depth).

TOC in Open Hole (with and without Mud Drop Enabled)


This external pressure profile is based on the specified pressure profile
defined on the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet, mud density, top
of cement (TOC), and cement mix-water density. This profile assumes
the top of cement (TOC) is in open hole. To allow the mud level to drop,
the Allow Mud Drop check box should be selected on the Tubular >
Burst Loads > Edit tab for the load case. From the Apply Minimum
EMW in Open Hole drop-down list on the Tubular > Burst Loads >
Edit tab, select Previous Shoe (default) or Top of Cement.

Discontinuity at TOC w/o


Mud Drop (if TOC selected).

With Mud Drop enabled, hydrostatic


pressure equates to EMW of
Minimum Formation Pressure
applied to prior shoe or at TOC.

This profile is only available as a burst criterion for casing strings (not
liners). The options on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Edit tab are only
available if the top of cement (TOC) is in open hole (that is, the interval
below the shoe of the previous string).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-55

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

The Minimum Formation Pore Pressure external profile always uses a


pressure profile reflecting the EMW corresponding to the minimum
pore pressure gradient in the open hole interval (that is, the interval
below the prior shoe depth, either applied from prior shoe depth or
current top of cement (TOC)).

Pore Pressure w/ Seawater Gradient


This burst external pressure profile is based on a seawater gradient from
MSL to the mudline and a linear pressure profile from the pressure at the
mudline to the pore pressure at the shoe depth for the current string.

Linear gradient connecting mudline


pressure and pore pressure at
shoe of current string.

Pore pressure at
casing shoe

If this profile is selected for an onshore well, the profile simplifies to a


linear pressure profile from 0 psig at MGL (Mean Ground Level) to the
pore pressure at the shoe depth for the current string.
This external pressure profile has the greatest applicability for surface
and conductor strings in offshore wells.

2-56

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Fluid Gradients w/ Pore Pressure


This external pressure profile is constructed from a mud density above
the top of cement (TOC), a fluid gradient from the top of cement (TOC)
to the prior shoe (when applicable), and in open hole, either the fluid
gradient below the top of cement (TOC) or the pore pressure profile.

This is the only external pressure profile available for Tieback strings.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-57

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Mud and Cement Slurry


This external pressure profile is based on the mud density from the
hanger to the top of cement (TOC) and the cement slurry density from
the top of cement (TOC) to the shoe.

It is identical to the external profile used with the Cementing load case,
but it can be used with any of the other load cases.
This is the most conservative external pressure profile and has the most
applicability to operations associated with inner-string cementing jobs.

2-58

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Frac @ Prior Shoe with Gas Gradient Above


This external pressure profile is constructed from the fracture pressure
at the prior shoe, a gas gradient extending upward from that depth, and
a mud gradient extending downward. It represents a worst-case collapse
external profile where gas flow has occurred behind the casing.

Fracture pressure at
prior shoe.

Mud gradient to current


shoe.

Shoe/Mud Gradients w/ Pore Pressure


This external pressure profile combines a mud weight pressure column
if top of cement is at or shallower than prior shoe setting depth, a
pressure discontinuity with an equivalent mud weight pore pressure
gradient at the prior shoe setting depth, and pore pressure in the open
hole. This profile supports two scenarios:

Top of cement (TOC) below prior shoe depth

Top of cement (TOC) above prior shoe depth.

For offshore wells, this burst profile is based on a seawater gradient


from MSL to the mudline, however 0 psig is used above sea level.
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-59

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

For onshore wells, 0 psig is used above ground level (MGL).


Below mudline or ground level, the profile used depends on the top of
cement (TOC) for the current string.

If TOC is above the prior shoe:

EMW pore pressure gradient between top of cement (TOC) and the
top of the prior shoe is displayed (read only) on the Burst Loads >
Edit tab.

Mud weight gradients above top of cement (TOC) are defined on


the Tabular > Burst Loads > Edit tab.

Pore pressure profile below the prior shoe is defined using the
Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet.

If TOC is below the prior shoe:

2-60

EMW pore pressure gradient above the prior shoe is defined on the
Burst Loads > Edit tab.

Mud weight gradients above TOC are displayed (read only) on the
Burst Loads > Edit tab.

Pore pressure profile between the prior shoe and top of cement
(TOC) is defined using the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet.

Pore pressure profile below top of cement (TOC) is defined using


the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

Hydrostatic Isolation Depth


This external profile is based on the Collapse Well Containment
Screening Tool (WCST) load. Hydrostatic Isolation Depth (HID) is
effectively the assumed top of good cement where hydraulic isolation is
achieved in the annulus. HID is specified in the Tabular > Collapse
Loads > Select tab. This profile supports two scenarios:

Above the Hydrostatic Isolation Depth (HID), the Fracture Gradient


at previous casing shoe and setting mud weight.

Below the Hydrostatic Isolation Depth (HID), the local pore


pressure.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

2-61

Chapter 2: Theory, Calculations, and References

2-62

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3

EDM and the Well Explorer


Located by default on the left side of the application window, the Well
Explorer functions much like the Microsoft Windows Explorer.
Specifically, it is organized as a hierarchical data tree, and you can
browse the EDM database at seven descending levels, though this
varies between applications. This section familiarizes you with the basic
Well Explorer functionality available in the StressCheck software.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-1

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Overview
In this chapter, you will become familiar with Landmark software
common featuresthe Engineers Data Model (EDM) database, and
how the data structure is exposed via the Well Explorer. Currently,
CasingSeat software, COMPASS software, OpenWells software,
StressCheck software, Well Cost software, WELLCAT software,
and WELLPLAN software use the common database and
data structure.
In this section of the course, you will:

3-2

Learn about the EDM data structure, common data, data locking,
and how to import and export data

Become familiar with the Well Explorer components and how to


access data levels

Understand how datums are handled by the database

Learn about the Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) and


concurrent use of data in EDM

Learn how to access Catalogs from the StressCheck software

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Describing the Data Structure


Shown below, the EDM database hierarchical data structure supports
the different levels of data required by drilling suite applications.
Database
Company

Hierarchical database
structure of the
EDM database.

Project
Site
Well
Wellbore
Design
Case

Note
The Case level applies only to the WELLPLAN software and is not discussed in
this manual.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-3

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

The EDM database structure is exposed through a common Well


Explorer, which is shared by drilling applications such as StressCheck
(see the following figure).

Database level (filtered)


Company level
Project level
Site level
Well level
Wellbore level
Design level

Rig Contractors level

Templates
Tubular Properties
Catalogs

Well Explorer Components


In addition to the Well Explorer tree previously shown, components
of the Well Explorer (shown below) include the Filter, Recent Bar,

3-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Associated Data Viewer, and the Well Configuration and Reference


Datum diagrams.
Filter
Shows currently selected filter (notice
the funnel on the database node that
indicates a filter is applied). It is used to
provide a filtered look of the overall
design.
Recent Bar
Shows the last selected data items; it is
used to quickly open recently
used items.

Hierarchical Tree
The selected node shows the currently
open Design.

Associated Data Viewer


Components associated with the
selected data item (the Design, in this
example). Double-clicking on Pore
Pressure, Frac Gradient, or Wellpath
opens the respective editor
on demand.

Well Configuration Diagram


Shows the current Well configuration
for the selected Design, including
sidetracks for complex Wellbores.

Reference Datum Diagram


Shows the current reference datum
information for the selected Design.

For more information about the specific Well Explorer components and
associated features, see the StressCheck Help.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-5

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Working with the Well Explorer


In this section, you will learn some basic operations performed with the
Well Explorer. For a detailed list of all features available in the Well
Explorer, see the StressCheck Help.

Drag-and-drop Rules
Drag-and-drop in the Well Explorer functions somewhat like the
Microsoft Windows Explorer. You can use drag-and-drop to copy
Projects, Sites, Wells, Wellbores, and Designs, as well as associated
data items and attached documents.
All drag-and-drop operations copy the data; data is never cut or moved.
To copy data, drag-and-drop the item from one location and paste it into
another. The item and all of its associated data are copied and pasted.
You can drag and drop associated items (Wellpaths, Pore Pressures,
Fracture Gradients, Geothermal Gradients, Hole Sections, Assemblies,
and so on) into open Designs from the Associated Data Viewer at the
base of the Well Explorer. The application automatically updates itself
with the copied data.
For more information, including the rules associated with drag-and-drop
functionality, see the StressCheck Help.

Instant Design
To access the Instant Design dialog box, select File > New > Instant
Design; or right-click the Database level and select Instant Design from
the drop-down menu. This dialog box allows you to quickly and easily
create the hierarchy required to start a Design, from the Company to the

3-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Design. Instant Design allows you to enter minimal information rather


than creating individual nodes for each level of the hierarchy.

Select the Company, Project,


and Site from the pull-down list
of existing Companies,
Projects, or Sites. You can also
enter a new name for the data
level.

Enter the name of the Well,


Wellbore, and Design.

Specify datum information.

Import
The Import command allows you to import selected data files in the
StressCheck software. These files can either be transfer files in
Extensible Markup Language (XML) format, StressCheck (SCK)
format files or wellpath data files in text (TXT) format.
Select File > Import > Transfer File or right-click the Database node
in the Well Explorer and select Import from the drop-down menu. The
Import dialog box opens. Enter the file name or browse for the file, and
then click Open. The file is imported in the EDM database and contains
the entire hierarchy (Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design
and any child data associated with the specific node).
Select File > Import > SCK File to import StressCheck SCK files. The
Import SCK File dialog box opens. Enter the file name or browse for
the file, and then click Open. At this point, the data is available in the
StressCheck software, but is not saved in the EDM database. Select File

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-7

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

> Save to save the imported data as a Design in the database. The Save
As dialog box opens. Select a site for the Design, and specify a Design
name in the New Design Name field. Click Save. The Well Explorer
updates to display the Design.
Select File > Import > WellPath to import and load delimited text
wellpath data in the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor. The Import
Wellpath File dialog box opens. Enter the file name or browse for the
file, and click Open. The Wellpath data becomes available in the
StressCheck software, but is not saved in the EDM database. Select File
> Save to save the imported wellpath data.
Note
The Wellpath command is only available in the File > Import menu if a Design is
open and the Wellpath is not read-only. For more information on importing
Wellpath files, see Import Wellpath File on page 5-15.

Export
The Export command allows you to export the selected nodes data in
XML format. It also allows you to export the currently open Design in
SCK (.sck) format.
For exporting the Database, select the database node from the Well
Explorer and select File > Export > Transfer File or right-click the
Database node and select Export from the drop-down menu. The
Export Library Transfer File dialog box opens. Enter a name for the
file in the File name field, select the file type from the Save as type box
and click Save.
For exporting the Company and its associated data, select the company
node from the Well Explorer and select File > Export > Transfer File
or right-click the company node and select Export from the drop-down
menu. The Export dialog box opens. Enter a name for the file in the File
name field, select the file type from the Save as type box and click
Save.
Note
You can export data at any level under the company node, using the method
available for exporting Company data.

3-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

For exporting a Design, open the Design and Select File > Export >
SCK File. The Export SCK File dialog box opens. Enter a name for the
file in the File name field and click Save.

Note
The SCK File option is only available in the File > Export menu if a Design is open
in StressCheck.

Attachments
You can associate a folder or a file, such as a document, picture (Word,
Excel, text file, JPG, and so on). Attached files can be of any type with
a recognized extension. Folder attachments will open any accessible
directory and display the contents of the folder. To access the

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-9

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Attachment Properties dialog box, right-click any data hierarchy node


and then select New Attachment from the menu.
Enter text that provides detailed
descriptive information about the
attachment.

Click Browse to navigate to the location of


the file. If you know the path, you can enter
it without using the Browse button.

Select the Save attachment as a link/shortcut only check box if you want to save the attachment
as a link only. If you select this check box, only the link to the disk file is stored in the database. Any
edits you make are saved to the original disk file. You can edit the document directly from the Well
Explorer, or you can edit the disk file from its disk location; the changes are reflected in both places.
In the Associated Data Viewer, the icon representing a Linked document is shown as a paperclip
with a small arrow in the lower left corner.

3-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Well Explorer Node Properties


Right-click any Well Explorer data node and select Properties from the
drop-down menu to view or edit the selected nodes properties in a
dialog box, such as the Company Properties dialog box shown below.

A brief description of data locking features is provided below. Details of


the differences between the properties dialog boxes for each node, such
as the specific tabs and content, is discussed in StressCheck Help.

Data Locking
You can prevent other people from making changes to data by locking
data at various levels and setting passwords. Users can only open the
data item in read-only mode. To keep changes, they must use Save As
or Export.

How Locking Works


You can lock Company properties only, or you can lock properties for
all levels below Company (Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, and
Case). Passwords can be set to prevent unlocking.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-11

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

By default, passwords are not set, and the Locked check box on all
Properties dialog boxes can be toggled on and off with no security to
prevent users from doing something they should not.
In the Well Explorer, if a data item is locked, a small blue key appears
in the corner of its icon. When you open a locked data item, you see the
message: This Design is locked and therefore Read-Only. Changes to
this Design will not be saved to the database. To keep your changes, use
the Save As or Export options.

Locking Company Properties


In the Properties dialog box for the company whose data you want to
protect, there are two buttons, Company Level and Locked Data, and
a Company is locked check box.
When you click the Company Level button, you are prompted to set a
password to protect Company properties (and only the Company
properties). This password will then be required if a user wants to
unlock company properties and make changes.
After the password is set, select the Company is locked check box to
lock the company properties and prevent unauthorized changes to
the data.

Locking Levels Below Company


When you click the Locked Data button on the Company Properties
dialog box, you are prompted to set a password. This password will then
be required if a user wants to unlock any level below the company
(projects, sites, wells, wellbores, designs, and cases).
All levels are locked individuallythat is, you can lock a Well, but this
does not mean that anything below it is locked.
After the Locked Data password is set, you can lock properties for any
data level below Company and prevent unauthorized changes to the
data. Open the Properties dialog box for the data level you want to lock
and select the Locked check box. (For example, to lock a Wellbore,

3-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

open the Wellbore Properties dialog box and select the Wellbore is
locked check box.)
Note
When a design is locked, all associated items (Pore Pressure, Fracture Gradient,
Geothermal Gradient, and Wellpath) are locked with it.

General Tab
On the General tab of the Company Properties dialog box, the
Company is locked check box and Locked Data and Company Level
password buttons are discussed below. All Well Explorer node
Properties dialog boxes, with the exception of the Database level,
contain the [Node Type] is locked check box.

Company is Locked Check Box


Select this check box to prevent editing of the Company data. If this
check box is checked and either a Company Level or Locked Data
password has been specified, you will be prompted for the password
before you can deselect this check box.

Passwords

Locked DataClick this button to specify a password to lock all


data associated with the Company, including all Projects, Sites,
Wells, Wellbores, and Designs.

Company LevelClick this button to specify a password to lock


only the Company data. The Company level password is only
active if the Company is locked check box is checked.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-13

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Click Locked
Data to specify
a password to
lock all data
associated
with the
Company.

Select the Company is Locked check box to


prevent editing the company level data.

Click Company Level Locked Data to specify a


password to lock Company data.

Audit Tabs
In dialog boxes that contain the Audit Tab, information such as when
the Company was created and last modified (and by whom) is displayed.

3-14

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Datums
Datum terms are defined below and are grouped by the Properties
dialog box in which they are found.

Project Properties
The Project Properties dialog box contains a General tab in which you
can specify System Datum and Elevation.

System Datum
The System Datum represents absolute zero. It is the surface depth
datum from which all Well depths are measured, and all Well depths are
stored in the database relative to this datum. Usually the System Datum
is Mean Sea Level, Mean Ground Level, or Lowest Astronomical Tide,
but it can also be the wellhead, rig floor, RKB, and so on.

Elevation
The Elevation represents the elevation above Mean Sea Level. (If Mean
Sea Level is selected as the System datum, Elevation is grayed out.)

Well Properties
The Well Properties > General tab is used to specify the Well name,
Unique Well Identifier (UWI), and other descriptive properties of the
well. You can also set tight group security, activate the unit system for
the Design, and specify and define the Depth Reference datums.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-15

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Depth Reference Datum(s)


The Depth Reference Datum represents zero MD. It is sometimes
known as the local datum, and it is measured as an elevation from the
System Datum. You can define one or more Depth Reference Datums
for a Well in the Depth Reference tab (in the Well Properties dialog
box). For each Depth Reference Datum, you must specify the elevation
above or below the System Datum.

Elevations above, Depths below: [System Datum]


This read-only label identifies the current System Datum. It also states
that all elevations are measured ABOVE the System datum and all
depths are measured BELOW the System datum. (The System datum is
specified on the General tab (Project Properties).
A pull-down list below the label contains all defined Depth Reference
datums. Select the Depth Reference datum you want to use to view and
calculate data. If you do not specify a Depth Reference datum here, a
Default Datum with zero elevation above System datum will be used.
Information about each datum includes:

3-16

Datum - Type, edit, or view the name of the datum.

Default - When selected, this check box indicates that this is the
default datum. All Designs created below this Well inherit the
default datum.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Elevation - Type, edit, or view the elevation above the System


Datum (this must be a positive number). If you have a Design
associated with this datum, you cannot edit this field. If no Design
is associated with this datum, you can edit the elevation.

Rig Name - Type, edit, or view the name of the rig.

Date - Type the date on which the datum was created. The program
uses the date field to determine which is the newest datum, and then
uses that datum as the default for new Wellbores.

Configuration

For a Land Well - If the Well is a land Well, type the value for the
Ground Elevation above the System Datum (must be a positive
number). Leave the Offshore check box deselected.

For an Offshore Well - If the Well is an offshore Well:


Select the Offshore check box to indicate it is an offshore Well.
Type the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the column
of water.
Type the Wellhead Elevation (positive above the
System Datum).

For an Offshore Well that is Subsea - If the Well is an offshore


Well subsea:
Select the Offshore check box.
Select the Subsea check box. (The Offshore check box must be
selected before this option becomes available.)
Type the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the column
of water.
Type the Wellhead Depth (positive below the System Datum
specified on the General Tab (Project Properties)).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-17

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Summary
In the Summary area, a graphic depicts the selected configuration
(onshore, offshore, or offshore subsea), and displays current values. The
following values are calculated and/or displayed:

Datum - This is the default datum selected in the Well Properties


> Depth Reference dialog box.

Datum Elevation - This is the elevation of the default datum above


the System Datum.

Air Gap - This is the distance from ground level/sea level to the rig
floor. It is used in some calculations for hydrostatic head. Air Gap
is always positive. The application calculates Air Gap as follows:
(Air Gap, Offshore Wells) = Datum Elevation Elevation (of
the System Datum relative to Mean Sea Level)
(Air Gap, Land Wells) = Datum Elevation Ground Level
(relative to the System Datum)
Elevation is set in the Project Properties > General dialog box.
Ground Level is set in the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab.
Datum Elevation is the elevation for the Depth Reference Datum.
Datum Elevation is always positive. If you change the datum
selection, the Air Gap updates automatically.
If you change the datum and it causes a negative air gap to be
calculated, a warning message appears to inform you that you cannot
select this datum.

3-18

[System Datum] - Display the current System Datum.

Mudline Depth (MSL) - (Offshore only) Display the distance from


MSL to the sea bed, which is

Water Depth Elevation (System Datum offset from MSL, which


is set in the Project Properties dialog box).

Mudline TVD - (Offshore only) Display the distance from the


Depth Reference Datum to the sea bed (datum Elevation +
Water Depth).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Design Properties
The Design Properties dialog box is used to specify a unique name for
the Design. You can also select the Design phase, Depth Reference
Datum for the Design and Lock the Design level data.

General Tab (Design Properties Dialog Box)


Use this tab to specify a unique Design name that identifies the Design,
and to provide additional information related to the Design. This tab is
also used to lock the Design and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the Design. A Design
name is required. Additional information on this dialog box is used for
informational and reporting purposes and is not required.

The following fields are present:


In the Details section:

Design - Type the name that will be used to identify the Design.
The name must be unique.
Note
If the Design is locked check box is selected, you cannot edit any of the fields.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-19

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Version - Type the version of the Design.

Phase - Select the phase of the Design from the pull-down list
(Prototype, Planned, or Actual). The list of phases that appears in
the combo box is filtered; you can only have one Design marked as
Planned and one marked as Actual. The Planned or Actual
option is removed from the pull-down list if another Design for the
same Wellbore already has it set. You can have as many Prototype
(the default) Designs as desired.

Effective Date - Select the date from the drop-down list box. A
calendar dialog box will open. Use the arrow buttons on the
calendar dialog box to move to the desired month, then click the
day. The date you select populates the field.
Click arrows
to change to
desired
month.
Click on the
desired day

Depth Reference Information


From the pull-down list of defined Depth Reference datums, select the
datum you want to reference for this Design. After you select a datum,
the Datum Elevation, Air Gap, current System Datum, Mudline Depth,
and Mudline TVD are all recalculated and display the updated values
adjacent to the rig elevation drawing on the Design Properties
dialog box.

WorkflowHow to Set Up Datums for a Design


1. Access the Project Properties > General tab and select the System
Datum you want to use.
2. Access the Project Properties > General tab. In the Elevation
field, enter the value the System Datum is above Mean Sea Level. If
your System Datum is below Mean Sea Level, this number is
negative. If your System Datum is Mean Sea Level, Elevation is
grayed out.

3-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

3. Access the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab.

If the Well is offshore, select the Offshore check box and enter
the Water Depth below the System Datum.

If the Well is subsea, select the Subsea check box and enter the
Wellhead Depth below the System Datum.

4. Access the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab. If the Well is a
land Well, make sure the Offshore check box is unchecked and
enter the Ground Level elevation above the System Datum.
5. Access the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab. Define the
Depth Reference Datum(s) you want to use, such as RKB or Rig
floor. Type the elevation above the System Datum in the Elevation
field and specify the effective Date for the datum.
6. Import or create a Design for this Well.
7. In the Design Properties > General tab, select the Depth
Reference Datum you want to use for this Design from the
pull-down list of datums you defined in Step 5.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-21

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Changing the Datum


When you create a Design and save it for the first time, the EDM
database keeps track of the Depth Reference Datum that was set at the
time. This original Depth Reference Datum is not displayed; however,
if you or someone else changes the Depth Reference Datum in the Well
Properties dialog box, and you then attempt to open that Design, a
warning message appears. You are warned that you are trying to change
to a datum that is different from the datum in which you originally saved
the data, and any calculations will be invalid unless you change your
inputs (details provided below). You are given the choice to open the
Design in the original datum, or to convert to the new datum. If you
choose to convert your data, the data is adjusted. However, the change
is not saved to the database until you save the Design, at which time the
new datum becomes the original datum.

How This Works

If datum is the same as the original datum


If you open a Design in which the Depth Reference Datum (set at the
Design level) is the same as the datum in which the data was originally
saved, the Design will open normally.

If datum is different than the original datum


If you open a Design in which the Depth Reference Datum (set at the
Design level) is different from the original datum, the following occurs:

3-22

The application checks to see if the Well is a slant hole. If positive


inclination exists in wellpaths whose depths would become
negative after the datum shift, the program cannot make the
adjustments and a message pops up to inform you of this. Click
Open to open the Design in the original datum. If you click Cancel,
the Design will not open.

For Wells other than slant holes, the program issues this message:
The currently selected Design datum is different to the datum with
which the Design was created. The application will then attempt to
adjust the data, but some data might be shifted or removed. If you
open the Design, we strongly suggest that you review your input
data; any changes will not be saved to the database until you
explicitly save your data. Please click Open to review the Design
using the datum with which it was created.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

If you want to open the Design with the original elevation, select
Open. If you want to convert the data to the new elevation, select
Adjust. Open is the default.
If you click Open, data is loaded to the original Design datum,
but the Depth Reference Datum set in the Design does not
change to match the original datum.
If you click Adjust, the Well Explorer loads the data to the new
Wellbore datum and attempts to adjust the data; however, some
data may be shifted or removed. The program resolves the
deltas in the first depths of column data (strings, wellpaths,
columns, and so on) to adjust for the new gap and read zero
depth on the first line.

Note
After you open the Design, you should review your input data. Remember that
the changes are not saved to the database until you explicitly save your data.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-23

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Concurrency and Multi-user Support


EDM supports full concurrency for multiple applications that are using
the same data set. The SAM (Simultaneous Activity Monitor) server
moderates the activity. This messaging server notifies a user of all data
items currently open by other applications and users sharing the
same database.

SAM in the Application Status Bar


The SAM icon appears in the application Status Bar as follows:
Message

Description
A green SAM icon in the status bar indicates that the
Messenger Service is active. If a tooltip is available, the
message SAM-Connected displays.
A green SAM icon with a red X in the status bar indicates that
the Messenger Service is not currently active. If a tooltip is
available, the message SAM-Disconnected displays.
A red SAM icon in the status bar indicates the SAM service is
enabled but has lost connectivity. Hover over the icon to
display the tooltip SAM - No longer responding.

No icon

3-24

When no icon appears in the application status bar, this


indicates that the Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not been
configured for the application.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

SAM in the Well Explorer


If a data item is open, one of the following icons appears on the
node icon.
Icon

Description
A red SAM icon indicates that one or more users on other PCs have
this item open, and the current user is restricted to read-only access.

A blue SAM icon indicates that one or more users on the current
database have this item open, but the current user still has full
read-write access. A user must be careful when making changes to
the data, though this method enables data to automatically flow
between applications. Intentional updates to other live applications
should be anticipated before saving changes.

The first user to open a data item becomes the data items owner. When
another user opens the data item through an EDM application, that user
can see that the data item is currently being accessed by the first user,
who is the owner. Hover the mouse over the item to display a data listing
tooltip as seen below.

RW indicates that the current user has read-write access.


RO indicates that the current user has read-only access.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-25

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Reload Notification
A Reload Notification dialog box appears when the owner of the active
data item saves changes to the database. SAM then notifies any other
EDM applications of the changes. The Change Notification dialog box
is then offered to the user to reload or ignore the data owners changes,
or cancel the dialog box. The dialog box displays the user name for the
owner and the application in which the changes were made. This enables
the user to identify the source of the change that has been posted.

Reload
The Reload option results in the owners changes being uploaded into
the current application.

Ignore
The Ignore option gives you the ability to ignore the owners changes
and continue working with the current data item.
You may choose to ignore the updates if you own the data item in
another application.
In this instance, you may choose to save later and overwrite changed
data in the other application as a result.
The user with read-only access to the data item may choose to ignore the
owners changes in order to continue looking at the previous state of the
data. The user may also perform a Save As operation to save the current
data before reloading the changes. The WELLPLAN software does not
support Save As functionality for read-only access.

3-26

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Select the Do not ask the question again check box to avoid receiving
any other reload notifications. This check box option is not remembered
between sessions. If you restart an application, you must select the check
box the first time it appears in order to stop the appearance of the
reload notifications.

Cancel
The Cancel option gives you the opportunity to cancel the dialog box.
If this option is selected, the Do not ask the question again check box
is ignored.
Complete details about SAM settings can be found in EDM
Administration Utility Help.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

3-27

Chapter 3: EDM and the Well Explorer

Working with Catalogs


Catalogs are used as a selection list to design a casing, tubing, liner, or
drillstring. Catalogs are editable and can be customized by using
Start > Programs > Landmark Engineers Desktop 5000.1 >
Tools > Catalog Editor or by right-clicking the catalog node and select
Open from the drop-down menu. For more information, see the
Catalog Editor Help.

3-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4

Getting Started
When you first enter the StressCheck software, a blank application window displays beneath the
menu bar and toolbars. Normally at this point, you would either create a new Design or open an
existing Design. However, particularly in multi-user environments, you may want to specify
different data files (for example, report format files, default bit sizes, default design factors,
default cost factors, or template files) to be used during this StressCheck session.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-1

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Workflow
The workflow in the StressCheck software is broken up into three
stages, which are outlined below.

Enter General Data

4-2

Open the Design with which you want to work or create a Design
using the Instant Design feature. (Instant Design on page 3-6)

Enter general information, including the well name, description,


and total depth. (Wellbore > General)
(Enter General Data on page 4-2)

Enter wellpath deviation (wellpath) data. (Wellbore > Wellpath


Editor) (Entering Wellpath Data on page 5-14)

Enter dogleg overrides (imposed doglegs independent of deviation).


(Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides) (Dogleg Severity
Overrides Spreadsheet on page 5-16)

Define the pore pressure regime. (Wellbore > Pore Pressure)


(Entering Pore Pressure Data on page 5-8)

Define the fracture pressure regime. (Wellbore > Fracture


Gradient) (Entering Fracture Gradient Data on page 5-10)

Optional: Define any squeezing salt or shale sections for collapse


design. (Wellbore > Squeezing Salt/Shale) (Defining a
Squeezing Salt/Shale Zone on page 5-12)

Specify the formation temperatures. (Wellbore > Geothermal


Gradient) (Defining the Geothermal Gradient on page 5-19)

Define the Casing Scheme, including casing name, type, pipe ODs,
hole size, shoe, hanger and TOC depths, and the mud weight at the
shoe. (Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme) (Define the
Casing and Tubing Scheme on page 5-22)

Enter completion and production data. (Wellbore > Production


Data) (Defining Production Data on page 5-28)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Specify Design Parameters for a Casing String

Specify the design factors and other design parameters to use for
the casing design. (Tubular > Design Parameters) (Entering
Design Parameters on page 6-2)

Specify the maximum tool length for a specified tool OD that can
freely pass through the casing. (Tubular > Tool Passage) (Specify
Tool Passage Requirements on page 6-13)

Describe the cement and landing forces. (Tubular > Initial


Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab) (Specifying the
Initial Conditions on page 6-4)

Specify the temperature profile for the current string. (Tubular >
Initial Conditions > Temperature tab) (Specifying the Initial
Conditions on page 6-4)

Select standard load cases for burst, collapse and axial loads.
(Tubular > Burst Loads, Tubular > Collapse Loads, Tubular >
Axial Loads) (Defining Burst Loads on page 6-15, Specifying
Collapse Loads on page 6-24, and Specifying Axial Loads
Details on page 6-29)

Optional: Design additional custom loads. (Tubular > Custom


Loads) (Defining Custom Loads on page 6-30)

View Graphical Results and Perform Design

Review formation plots including pore pressure, fracture gradient,


pore/fracture/mud weight, and geothermal gradient. (View >
Formation Plots)

Review and analyze temperature profiles, pressure profiles, internal


pressures and differential pressure plots for burst and collapse
loads. (View > Burst Plots and View > Collapse Plots)

Review and analyze design load line, graphical interactive weight,


and grade selection, including design review, graphical design, and
minimum cost design. (View > Design Plots) (Checking Burst
Design Using the Burst Design Plot on page 7-2, Checking
Collapse Design Using the Collapse Design Plot on page 7-8, and
Checking Axial and Triaxial Design on page 7-16)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-3

Chapter 4: Getting Started

4-4

Review and analyze advanced results, including triaxial design


limit plot, and maximum allowable wear tables. (View > Triaxial
Check and View > Tabular Results) (Tabular Results on page 83, Checking Axial and Triaxial Design on page 7-16)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Getting Started
Starting the StressCheck Software
Title Bar
Work Area

Menu Bar
Toolbars

Filter
Recent
Bar

Hierarchical
Tree

Associated
Data Viewer

Well
Configuration

Reference
Datum
Diagram

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-5

Chapter 4: Getting Started

You can start the StressCheck software in two ways:

Select the Windows menu path Start > Programs > Landmark
Engineers Desktop 5000.1 > StressCheck.

Double-click the StressCheck desktop shortcut.

The first window to appear when you start the StressCheck software
looks similar to the one in the previous graphic. At this time, few menu
options are available and most of the toolbar icons are not available
for use.
You can select an item from the menu by using the mouse or the
keyboard quick keys. To use the quick keys to select an item, press and
hold the Alt key while pressing the underlined character in the menu
item. For example, to open the File menu, press Alt-F.
You must open an existing Design or create a new Design to expand the
menu bar options or to activate additional toolbar buttons.

4-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Files and Templates


What Type of Files Does the StressCheck Software Use?

File Extension

File Type Purpose

*.DXT

Data exchange (DEX) template file

*.DXD

Data exchange (DEX) import/export files

*.SCK

Well files created using the StressCheck software. Also


called flat files.

*.SCT

Template files created using the StressCheck software

*.TXT

Data files for importing directional data

*.XML

Extensible Markup Language (XML) file used to


transfer data

What is a Template File?


Templates contain common data that can be used and reused as defaults
for future casing designs. You can use templates as the basis for creating
Designs. Default data can be entered and saved in the template to a file
or to the EDM database. A template typically contains no specific well
data or data that is dependent on depth. Templates are used to describe
generic practices and parameters for general cases. For example,
templates can be used to set up default load cases for specific casing
string types typically used by an operating company.
A special group of default data already exists, which is the definition of
casing strings by name and type as specified in the Wellbore > Casing
and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. This information provides you with a
selection of design limits, load cases (burst, collapse, and axial), as well
as other tubular data. All combinations of casing strings can be defined
in this manner and saved in the template.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-7

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Some menu items and parameters are disabled when a template is


defined. In template mode, no calculations are performed, so some
results are displayed as N/A. Furthermore, some restrictions on
accessing various dialog boxes and entering data do not apply in
template mode. For example, you do not need to create pore pressure
data and fracture gradient data to access Tubular > Burst Loads.

Opening an Existing Template File


Templates can be opened from the EDM database or as a file from a
local or network drive. Templates are applied only once, when initially
creating or opening a Design, and cannot be reapplied. A company may
provide templates to users to set policy for certain materials, inventories,
casing schemes, and so on.
Select File > Template > Open From File or File > Template > Open
From Database to open an existing template file.

When opening a
template file,
navigate to the
location and select
from a list of
existing templates

When opening a
template from the
EDM database,
select from the
pull-down list.

4-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Saving a Template File


After you have opened and perhaps changed a template, you can save it
with the same name or with a new name. By saving the template with a
new name, you can create different templates to meet various
requirements. All templates are saved to the EDM database.
Select one of the following commands:

File > Template > Save to save the template with the same name.
No dialog box appears. The template is saved to the database.

File > Template > Save As to save the template with a different
name as shown below.

File > Template > Save As System Template to save the template
as a System Template that is available to all StressCheck users. The
dialog box is the same one that appears for the File > Template >
Save As command shown below.
The Save As System Template command may not be available due
to Company policy.

Specify the name of the


template file.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-9

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Main Window Layout


The StressCheck main window is shown below. In this window, the well
schematic is currently displayed. The main window is used to display
data entry dialog boxes and spreadsheets. It is also used to display
results. The main window has several distinct areas, as shown below.
Most of these options do not become available until after you open a
template file or Design.
Name of open
Design

Plot
Toolbar

Wizard
Toolbar

Template
Toolbar

Menu Bar
Main
Toolbar
Engineering
Toolbar

Well Explorer
Hierarchical
Tree

Associated
Data Viewer
Well
Configuration
Diagram

Reference
Datum Diagram

Tabs

4-10

Work area with


Well Schematic
displayed

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Status Bar

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Title Bar
The Title Bar is located at the top of the main window. The Title Bar
displays the name of the active Design and the name of the active
spreadsheet, table, plot, or schematic (if the active window
is maximized).

Menu Bar
After a Design has been opened or created, the menu bar has a number
of options available.

File Menu
The File menu has commands to manage files and templates, import
Wellpath .txt files, import or export StressCheck .sck and Transfer .xml
files, access DEX data transfer, send StressCheck .sck files via email,
print documents, and exit the StressCheck software.

Edit Menu
The Edit menu has commands used to undo changes; cut, copy, and
paste information; manipulate OLE objects; view/edit spreadsheet
properties; and find data in the Well Explorer tree.

Wellbore Menu
The Wellbore menu is used to define data not related to a specific casing
string, such as well depth; wellbore deviation; and pore pressure,
fracture pressure, and geothermal gradients.

Tubular Menu
The Tubular menu is used to define data related to a specific casing
string, such as design parameters, cementing and landing data,
string-section descriptions, connections, and load cases. This menu also
manages inventory items used with the current Design, such as pipe
inventory, special connections, and pipe grade properties.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-11

Chapter 4: Getting Started

View Menu
The View menu is used to display/hide the Well Explorer; display
wellbore, load case, and design plots; and display tabular reports.

Composer Menu
The Composer menu is used to add, edit, and configure Wall Plot
objects. The commands are only available when a Wall Plot is active in
the work area.

Tools Menu
The Options menu is used to customize the StressCheck software (set up
toolbars, status bars, tabs, defaults, options), and configure the
unit system.

Window Menu
The Window menu has commands to arrange and select windows.

Help Menu
The Help menu has commands to access online Help and obtain
information about the StressCheck software.

Wizard Toolbar
The Wizard toolbar provides easy access to common data selection and
form selection commands. It is used to select the current casing string.
The Wizard provides you with a predetermined sequence of entry forms
to help ensure that all necessary information is specified.
Go to the previous form in the Wizard list of entry forms.
Current data
entry form.
Go to the next form in the Wizard list.

All entry forms accessible using the Wizard can also be selected from
the Wellbore and Tubular menus.

4-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Data Entry Forms


The dialog box and spreadsheet are the two types of entry forms
available in the StressCheck software. They may all be accessed from
the Wellbore and Tubular menus, and most from the Wizard, depending
on how you are entering the well data.

Dialog Box
The first type of entry form is a dialog box, as seen in the example
below. When selected, the dialog box opens over the current window
contents. Dialog boxes are used to enter data such as design parameters
and load cases that cannot be conveniently presented in a spreadsheet.
All dialog boxes in the StressCheck software are modal, which means
you cannot access any other spreadsheets or dialog boxes until the
current dialog box is closed.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-13

Chapter 4: Getting Started

The following control buttons may be found in dialog boxes:


Select

To
Update the well with the current changes and close the
dialog box.
Disregard any changes made since the last update and close
the dialog box.
Update the well with the current changes and keep the dialog
box open.
Display Help for the dialog box.

Spreadsheets
The second type of entry form is the spreadsheet, as seen in the example
below. When selected, it fills the current StressCheck window pane.
Spreadsheets are used to enter depth and inventory data. Spreadsheets
remain in view until they are replaced by another spreadsheet or view.
Data is automatically applied when a further action occurs.

4-14

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Helpful Features
Online Help
The context-sensitive Help system can be accessed in several ways:

Press F1 to view Help on the active spreadsheet, plot, table, or


dialog box.

Select Contents from the Help menu.

Click the

Click the context-sensitive Help icon ( ) and then click on the


portion of the window for which you desire Help (such as a toolbar
icon or menu item). This feature is not available if a dialog box is
open.

button on an open dialog box.

The Help Contents is shown in the following graphic.


Click Back to go
to the previous
help topic.

Click Print to
print the current
help topic.

Select the tabs to view the Index and


Glossary, Search the entire help system,
or bookmark topics as Favorites.

Click Hide or Show to


toggle on and off the
Table of Contents.

Click a book to view


the help topics
associated with that
item. Then click a
help topic to view it.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-15

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Setting Options
Options are not stored as part of the active Design and affect all Designs
analyzed with the StressCheck software until the options are changed.
Select Tools > Options to access the Options dialog box.
Control the appearance of printed
documents.

Control the
appearance of the
graphical views.

Select MD or TVD
to determine how
depths are
displayed in plots,
spreadsheets, and
tables.

Control the
appearance of
spreadsheets and
tables.

Specify how
safety factors
display.

Control options for


Permit to Drill
report (APD).

Design Plots Group Box

Grid
Select the Grid check box to display grid lines on all plots. These lines
are used only as cues to help guide the eye when visually analyzing data.

Font Button
Click the Font button to display the Font dialog box so you can change
the font, style, and text size used along the axes of all plots.

4-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Markers
Select the Markers check box to display individual symbols to denote
each set of data displayed on all plots. Markers are usually drawn at
known or well-defined points, while the envelope lines connecting these
markers are generally interpolated.

Lines Button
Click the Lines button to display the Lines dialog box so you can set the
color and thickness for each line marking each set of data on every plot.

Legend
Select the Legend check box for the appropriate legend to appear in all
plots. When the legend obscures a relevant portion of the plot, click the
legend and drag it elsewhere.

Font Button
Click the Font button to display the Font dialog box so you can change
the font, style, and size of text used in all plot legends.

Spreadsheets and Tables Group Box

Grid in Tables
Select the Grid in Tables check box to draw grid lines and row labels
on all results tables, such as the Well Summary table.

Font Button
Click the Font button to display the Font dialog box so you can change
the font, style, and size of text used in all spreadsheets and tables.
Fonts for plots are customized by clicking the View Title Font button
in the Other group box.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-17

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Printing Font Button


Click the Printing Font button to display the Font dialog box to specify
the font used when printing spreadsheets and tables. It is useful for
printing a small font on wide spreadsheets and tables.

Print Layout Group Box

Headers and Footers


Select the Headers and Footers check box to display headers and
footers when a document is displayed by using the Print or Print
Preview commands.

The file name displays in the upper left corner.

The date and time at which the document was displayed and the
page number displays in the upper right corner.

The software version displays in the lower right corner.

The wells description displays in the lower left corner.

Page numbers do not display when the Page Numbering check box is
not selected.

Page Numbering
Select the Page Numbering check box to display page numbers in the
upper right corner of each page when a document is displayed by using
the Print or Print Preview commands. This check box is disabled if the
Headers and Footers check box is not selected.

Margins
Select the Margins check box to add margins to the top, bottom, left,
and right sides of each page when a document is displayed by using the
Print or Print Preview commands. If this check box is not selected, the
document is drawn out to the edges of every page.

4-18

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Depths Group Box

MD and TVD
MD and TVD are a pair of mutually exclusive option buttons that
determine whether depths in applicable plots, spreadsheets, and tables
are displayed by using measured (MD) or true vertical depth (TVD).
Alternatively, you can switch between depths by clicking the MD/TVD
icon ( ) on the Engineering toolbar.

Safety Factors Group Box

Absolute and Normalized Safety Factors


Absolute and Normalized are a pair of mutually exclusive option
buttons that determine whether the safety factors reported in the various
tabular results are absolute or normalized to the appropriate design
factor. In essence, the normalized safety factor is the absolute safety
factor divided by the design factor that is specified on the Design
Parameters dialog box, or the design factor that is specified on the
Options tab of the Tubular > Axial loads, Tubular > Burst loads, and
Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog boxes.
Alternatively, you can switch between safety factors by clicking the
Normalized > Absolute Safety Factors icon ( ) on the
Engineering toolbar.

MMS Report Group Box

Default Calculation Method


Select the MASPfrac or MASPbhp option from the Default
Calculation Method drop-down to calculate MASP values displayed in
the MMS reports. You can also select the Default option to use the
lesser MASP value of the two methods.

Default Depth Reference Point


Select the RKB option to use the Rotary Kelly Bushing location as the
Depth Reference Point. Select the Hanger option to use the pipe string
hanger location as the Depth Reference Point.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-19

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Other Group Box

Detailed Wizard List


Select the Detailed Wizard List check box to add several dialog boxes,
spreadsheets, and design plots to the standard Wizard list. When this
check box is selected, the following items are added to the Wizard:

Dogleg Severity Overrides


Squeezing Salt/Shale
Geothermal Gradient

View Title Font Button


Click the View Title Font button to access the Font dialog box so you
can change the titles font, style, and size displayed in plot legends.

4-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Configuring Units
Using the Unit System Dialog Box
Select Tools > Unit System to add, remove, edit, and switch unit
systems. You can also import and export custom unit systems. The unit
system for the Design you are working on is stored at the Well level. All
unit systems are stored in the database.
The API, SI, API - US Survey Feet, and Mixed API unit
systems are included with the StressCheck installation.
Select the unit
system you
want to use in
the analysis
from the
pull-down list.

Click Import to
import a unit
system.
Click New to
create a unit
system.

The Unit Systems Editor dialog box always contains three or more tabs
arranged along its upper left cornerone for each available unit system
stored in the database. The three left-most tabs are always API, SI, and
API - US Survey Feet. The Mixed API unit set is shipped with the
StressCheck software, but it can be deleted. If you create custom unit
systems, they are also present as tabs. When this dialog box is opened,
the tab containing the unit system associated with the active Design
opens.
Most numerical dialog box fields and spreadsheet cells are associated
with a physical parameter such as depth, stress, or temperature, and each
physical parameter is expressed in a unit.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-21

Chapter 4: Getting Started

To look at the values for a different unit system, select another tab and
click OK.
To switch to another unit system, select the desired unit system from the
Active Viewing Unit System pull-down list, and click OK. All open
Designs are presented in this unit system.
The Status Bar at the bottom of the main screen displays the name of the
unit system that is currently in use. Unit system is set at the Well level
and affects all Wellbores and Designs below it.
For more information, refer to Unit System Help.
CAUTION
Be careful when you delete. Other users may want to use the unit system you are
planning to delete.

Creating a Unit System


To create a unit system:
1. Open the Unit Systems Editor dialog box by selecting Tools > Unit
System.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the unit system.

Select the basis for


the unit system from
the pull-down list.

4. Click OK. You can now choose from a large variety of unit options
for all physical parameters used in the StressCheck software.

Using the Convert Unit Dialog Box


With a spreadsheet cell selected, press F4 or select Tools > Convert
Unit to enter or view data in any equivalent unit without changing the

4-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

unit systems currently in use. Only the value in the active cell/field is
affected. When you close this dialog box, any new numerical value
chosen is written to the field, but the value is displayed in the unit system
already in use. If you want a new unit system used, you must use Tools >
Unit Systems, which changes the unit systems for all fields.
To use the Convert Unit dialog box, a spreadsheet cell or a dialog box
field that is editable must be selected, and it must have a value
associated with a physical parameter (Tools > Unit Systems). For
default values, the program displays the value appropriate for the
units selected.
The Convert Unit dialog box contains the following:

Value
By default, this is the value displayed in the field or cell from which the
Convert Unit dialog box was invoked. You can type or paste a new
value into this cell, and it will be converted to the current unit system
after you click OK.

Unit
The Unit list box has the units in which the value can be expressed.
Select the appropriate unit from this list and its value displays in the
Value field.
Note
Be aware that when this dialog box is invoked, its name varies according to the cell
selected. For example, when it is invoked from the Zone Top cell in the Squeeze
Salt/Shale spreadsheet, the dialog box is titled Convert Depth Units. When it is
invoked from the Overburden Pressure cell, it is titled Convert Pressure Units.

After you click OK, the dialog box closes, and the value is placed in the
field or cell from which the Convert Unit dialog box was invoked.
Before the value is placed, it is converted back to the units used by the
active unit system. If the dialog box was invoked from a field or cell in
which the Paste command does not work, the value is ignored. The
Undo command can be used if a new value was entered.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-23

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Example
In the following example, the Mix-Water Density units are changed.

Click in the cell or field that you want to convert the


units from. The Convert Unit dialog box displays.
Select the new unit from the Unit list. View the
converted value in the Value field.

1. Click a cell or field that contains the units you want to convert, from
the active spreadsheet or dialog box.
2. Select Tools > Convert Unit, or press F4 to display the Convert
Unit dialog box.
3. Select the desired unit from the Unit list.
4. View the converted value in the Value field.

Using the Convert Unit Dialog Box


With a Design open, press F9 or select Tools > Convert Depth to
calculate True Vertical Depth (TVD) from Measured Depth (MD) or
vice versa.

4-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

To calculate TVD from MD:


1. Enter a value in the ft MD field.
2. Click MD to TVD ->.

To calculate MD from TVD:


1. Enter a value in the ft TVD field.
2. Click <- TVD to MD.

Note
The Convert Depth dialog box uses values from the Wellpath to convert MD to
TVD and vice versa. If a Design does not contain Wellpath values such as
Inclination or Azimuth, then Convert Depth will not calculate correct value.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-25

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Customizing Graphical Views


To change the properties of a plot or schematic, right-click the object
when the plot or schematic is active. The choices available vary
depending on the nature of the object.

Right-click on the plot, then


select Properties.

4-26

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Changing Plot Properties


All plots can be modified by right-clicking while a plot is active and then
selecting Properties. The StressCheck software uses two plot engines.
Each plot engine displays different properties dialog boxes, as
seen below.

Older plot engine


Properties dialog
box

Newer plot engine


Properties dialog
box

For details about configuring plot display, see StressCheck Help.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-27

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Zooming
The older plot engine right-click menu features a Zoom facility. You can
zoom in as many as 10 times to investigate specific features. A Restore
feature allows the view to be restored to its last setup.
Select the desired
magnification.

Select Restore to return to


the previous
magnification.

Configuring the Well Schematic


On the Well Schematic, the right-click menu Properties command
allows the display of various markers on the schematic, including
Cement, Tapered String, Reference Depths, Fluid, Casing Float Shoe,
TOC for Liners and Casing Strings, TOL, and a Non-Deviated
schematic view.

4-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Accessing and Managing Pipe Inventory


When the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet is accessed for the
first time, it displays an inventory of casing for the OD corresponding to
the OD designation in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet for the string that is currently selected. The pipe inventory
for a different OD can be selected using the Select OD pull-down list on
the Template toolbar. The entire pipe inventory for all sizes can be
displayed by selecting All at the top of this list box.
Select the OD that you want to view
data for using this selection list.

The pipe inventory is automatically sorted on the basis of the three keys
specified in the Sorting dialog box. The default key settings are OD
(primary), weight (secondary), and grade (tertiary) which are accessed
from View > Sorting dialog box.

The Pipe Inventory Catalog (accessed by using the Edit > Import from
Catalog and Edit > Export to Catalog commands when the current
view is the Pipe Inventory spreadsheet) contains a built-in API catalog

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-29

Chapter 4: Getting Started

that contains all API casing, as listed in Table 1 of API Bulletin 5C2, as
well as API line-pipe in the range of 22-42 inches OD.

Default performance properties for API line pipe are calculated on the
basis of API Bulletin 5C3 formulations for internal yield pressure
(burst), pipe body yield strength (axial), and collapse pressure. For
collapse pressure ratings determined by this method, be aware that the
API Bulletin 5C3 collapse pressure formulations are, in large part,
empirically derived from testing on materials of greater minimum yield
strength and tubes of lesser D/t (diameter-to-wall thickness) ratio than
are typical of API casing. API does not recommend using the 5C3
collapse formulations for line pipe, but it does state in 2.4 of 5C3 that
For line pipe having a yield strength and D/t falling within the limits of
the sizes and thickness listed in API Specification 5CT, application of
the formulas in 2.2 (the API collapse formulas) should yield reasonable
estimates of minimum collapse pressure. Sound engineering judgment
is recommended when using these line pipe ratings.
Each valid entry (or row) in the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet
defines a pipe that is available for manual, graphical, or minimum-cost
design. To be considered a valid entry, every cell in a row, except In
Inven., must contain a legitimate value. By default, the initial contents

4-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

of the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet for a given Design are
identical to the contents of the API catalog in the Pipe Inventory
spreadsheet. However, immediately after the Design is created,
supplemental entries can be made to the Pipe Inventory as required.
Pipe Inventory entries that you want excluded from consideration in the
Design can, and should, be deleted from the inventory. These inventory
changes only affect available casing in the current Design, and the API
catalog in a Design remain unchanged.
Note
The only Tubular > Pipe Inventory entries that cannot be modified or removed are
those that are currently included in the design of one or more strings by virtue of
their selection in a Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. If you attempt to modify
or remove them, the status bar displays the message This pipe is in use and cannot
be modified.

Select the View > Selection dialog box to facilitate selecting casings
you want removed from the current pipe inventory, or you want added
to that used in a different Design. In the dialog box, specify an OD, one
or more weights, and one or more grades, and then click OK. All pipe
inventory entries matching the selection criteria are highlighted and can
then be deleted or copied.

Selecting and Deleting Pipes


The Selection dialog box is useful when deleting pipes from an
inventory or when selecting multiple entries to be copied from one
spreadsheet to another.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-31

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Select View > Selection to access the Selection dialog box.

The Selection dialog box is only enabled when the Tubular > Pipe
Inventory spreadsheet is active.
After specifying an OD, one or more weights, and one or more grades,
click OK to highlight all spreadsheet entries that match the
selection criteria.
Multiple entries can be deleted by first selecting them from the
Selection dialog box located on the View menu. In the preceding
example, all the 9-5/8 pipe with the following grades are selected:
H-40, L-80 and Q-125.
Click OK to close the dialog box. The selected pipe is highlighted on the
spreadsheet. Use Edit > Delete Row to delete the selected items.
Note
Deleting a string currently being used in a Design removes this pipe sections grade,
weight, or both from the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. It must be reentered into the Tubular > Pipe Inventory for it to be used again.

4-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Modifying Existing Pipes


If the pipe type is defined as a Standard pipe, the burst, collapse, and
axial ratings are calculated by using the standard API formula. These
ratings can be overwritten by defining this particular pipe as being a
Special pipe type.

Click in the cell to display the pull-down list. Select Special if you want to
overwrite the calculated values for burst, collapse, and axial strength.

The Standard pipe type uses API Alternate (special) Drift diameter by
default. To specify an API Minimum Drift, select the Min. API
Pipe Type.
Note
If the pipe is being used in a Design, the properties cannot be modified until that
pipe is temporarily removed from the string sections spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-33

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Inserting a New Pipe


You can insert a pipe into the spreadsheet by using either the Edit or
right-click menu commands.
Click the row below where you want to insert a new
row. Select Edit > Insert Row (or right-click and select
Insert Row from the drop-down menu) to insert the
row. Add the information needed to define the pipe.

Refresh the spreadsheet for the Standard ratings to be calculated after


the data is entered. The pipe type can then be modified to Special, and
the customized ratings can be entered.

Tubular Properties
The Tubular Properties node contains items that allow you to define the
physical properties of any unusual pipe grades or special materials (such
as corrosion resistant alloys), as well as the deration of the material's
yield strength as a function of temperature.
Tubular Properties is available from the Well Explorer tree. To open a
specific spreadsheet, double-click the desired Tubular Properties item,
or right-click it and select Edit from the drop-down menu.

Tubular Properties spreadsheets are not included in the Wizard list.

4-34

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Locking Tubular Properties and Password Security


All Tubular Properties spreadsheets contain a Locked check box. Select
this check box to prevent editing of the tubular properties data. When
locked, users can open the respective dialog box in read-only mode, but
cannot save any changes. If this check box is selected and a Tubular
Properties password has been specified, you are prompted for the
password before you can deselect this check box.
To change or remove password security applied to locking or unlocking
Tubular Properties, right-click the Tubular Properties node in the Well
Explorer and select Change Tubular Properties Password from the
menu.

A security token is available in the EDM Administration utility to enable


this command and allow users to initially set and then change the
Tubular Properties password. The Old Password field is enabled when
changing an existing password. If the old password is entered but the
new password field is left blank, password security is removed and
Tubular Properties are unlocked without the need for a password.

CAUTION
Use caution when applying Tubular Property security because EDM Administrators
need the old password to reset a forgotten password. Passwords are encrypted and
require Database Administrators to use a SQL or Oracle tool to clear.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-35

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Importing and Exporting Tubular Properties


Import and Export right-click menu commands are available from the
Tubular Properties node in the Well Explorer. Custom (user) defined
class, material, derations, and grades are exported as a Tubular Transfer
(*.tub.xml) file. Once exported, the *.tub.xml file can then be imported
into a different EDM database.

Grades
The Grade spreadsheet is used to define the physical properties of all
pipe grades or special materials (such as corrosion-resistant alloys) used
in the pipe inventory and catalog. The grades you define will be used as
a selection list when defining a component using catalogs; for example,
when you select a grade in the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet.
You must enter a unique name to define the grade. Specify the yield
strength, the ultimate tensile strength, and the underlying material
behavior (mechanical and thermal properties).

Specify grades on
the Tubular
Properties >
Grade
spreadsheet.

4-36

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Notes

Material behavior is further defined by the selection of a Material name leading


to two additional spreadsheets (Materials Properties Spreadsheet and
Temperature Deration Spreadsheet).

Changes made to grade properties affect the current design only (localized
change). If the selected grade exists in the Tubular Properties Summary table,
this grade will be associated with the string section and used in calculations.
Thus, all pipes with the same grade use the same properties.

If a grade is API, it is read only and cannot be altered or deleted.

Grade Spreadsheet Columns

Grade
This cell contains the name of the specified pipe grade. No two grades
should have the same name.

Material
This cell contains a pull-down list of available material types. The
material is defined in a separate spreadsheet (Material Properties) to
capture the mechanical and thermal properties of the underlying
material from which the pipe grade has been manufactured.

Minimum Yield Strength


This editable cell contains the yield strength of the pipe grade. This
information is echoed within the pipe inventory and is used to default
the pipe ratings (burst, collapse, and axial). Additionally, triaxial stress
analysis is compared to this value for determination of sufficiency
in design.
Note
Analysis for anisotropic materials is not presently implemented in the StressCheck
software. All material-strength properties are assumed to be isotropic.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-37

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Fatigue Endurance Limit


Enter the fatigue endurance limit of the pipe. This value is used in the
Torque Drag analysis. Fatigue endurance limit is not a constant value
that is related to the yield strength of the pipe. The fatigue endurance
limit needs to be reduced if the steel is used in a corrosive environment
like saline (high chloride) or hydrogen sulfide environment.

Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS)


This editable cell contains the ultimate tensile strength (UTS) of the pipe
grade. This information is also echoed within the pipe inventory, and it
is used under special conditions to default the axial ratings of API
connections made of this grade.

Materials
The Materials spreadsheet is used to define the physical properties of all
alloys used in the pipe inventory and catalog.
Materials are defined by a unique name. Each material name is then
further characterized by several mechanical and thermal properties.
The Steel (default) entry can be edited but not deleted. The properties in
this entry represent those of low-alloy carbon steel, which is used in
nearly all casing applications for oil and gas wells. Most of the time, the
default option is all you will need when creating new grades and linking
to the material choice. However, if you are using CRA materials, such
as austenitic alloys (for example, Incoloy 825, Hastelloy G-3, or
Sanicro 28), which have significantly different mechanical and thermal
properties than the Steel (default), you should add additional entries to
this spreadsheet characterizing their behavior.
In addition to the typical mechanical and thermal properties
characterizing a materials behavior, this spreadsheet allows for the
specification of a schedule used to determine how a materials (and
ultimately a grades) minimum yield strength is affected by temperature.
Currently, the temperature deration schedule only applies to the pipe
body and not to the connections employing the material choice.

4-38

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Material Properties Spreadsheet Columns

Material Name
This cell contains the name of the material whose properties are being
specified. No two entries should have the same material name. The Steel
(default) material may have its properties edited, but the entry cannot
be deleted.

Youngs Modulus
This cell contains Youngs modulus for the material from which pipes
of this material are made.

Poissons Ratio
This cell contains Poissons ratio for the material from which pipes of
this material are made.

Density
This cell contains the density for the material in pounds per cubic foot.
The density of steel (490 lbm/ft^3) is the default value.

Expansion Coefficient
This cell contains the thermal expansion coefficient for the material
from which pipes of this material are made.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-39

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Radial Yield Factor


This cell contains the radial yield factor of the material from which pipes
of this material are made. For certain pipe materialsnotably the
corrosion-resistant alloys (CRAs)the minimum yield strength (MYS)
may be anisotropic (that is, not be the same in all directions). In this
case, the MYS is based on the axial MYS, and factors are used to reduce
the MYS in the radial and hoop directions.

Hoop Yield Factor


This cell contains the hoop yield factor of the material from which pipes
of this material are made. For certain pipe materialsnotably the
corrosion-resistant alloys (CRAs)the minimum yield strength (MYS)
may be anisotropic (that is, not the same in all directions). In this case,
the MYS is based on the axial MYS, and factors are used to reduce the
MYS in the radial and hoop directions.

Temperature Deration Schedule Name


This cell contains a pull-down list of available temperature deration
schedules. The schedule is defined in a separate spreadsheet
(Temperature Deration) to capture the deration of the materials yield
strength as a function of temperature.

Class
Click to expand the Tubular Properties node in the Well Explorer, and
then double-click Class to open the Class spreadsheet. You can also
right-click Class and select Edit from the drop-down menu to open the
spreadsheet. This spreadsheet is used to compile a list of tubular classes
and associated properties. This list is used as a selection list while
defining a component using catalogs.

4-40

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Class Spreadsheet Columns

Service Class
Enter a unique name to identify the class. The defined classes are used
as a selection list for defining the class of some components
using catalogs.

Wall Thickness (%)


Enter the percentage of the total wall thickness that is associated with
the specified service class. The wall thickness percentage is used to
calculate the existing outside diameter of the tubular.

Description
Type a short description of the class.

Temperature Derations
Click to expand the Tubular Properties node in the Well Explorer, and
then double-click Temperature Derations to open the Temperature
Deration spreadsheet. This spreadsheet is used to define the schedule
used to derate the minimum yield strength of a material as a function of
the temperature.
Temperature deration schedules are defined by a unique name. Each
schedule name is then further characterized by a multi-linear decay of
the yield strength versus temperature.
The default schedule entry can be edited but not deleted. This default
schedule corresponds to a linear reduction in yield strength of
0.03% per F. This schedule is used for the Steel (default) material that
describes the low-alloy carbon steels represented by the typical API pipe
grades in the inventory. Any new schedule created should have at least
two temperature deration points defined, as shown in the following
graphic, to capture the linear decay behavior.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

4-41

Chapter 4: Getting Started

Temperature Deration Spreadsheet Columns

Temperature Deration Schedule Name


This cell contains the name of the temperature deration schedule whose
properties are being specified. No two entries should have the same
name. You may edit the default schedule properties, but you cannot
delete the entry.

Temperature Deration Points


Up to ten pairs of points can be specified to characterize the deration of
the materials yield strength as a function of temperature. Each pair of
points consists of a temperature and a correction factor associated with
that temperature. The default schedule corresponds to a linear reduction
in yield strength of 0.03% per F.
This pair is entered in the spreadsheet as the following two points:
Temperature (F)

Correction Factor

68

1.00

500

0.87

The default schedule can be modified (edited) if desired but not deleted.

4-42

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5

Well and Formation Information


The first stage of well design is to define the general well configuration and formation
information, which defines the overall parameters governing the well conditions. All the
subsequent casing strings will use this global definition of the well.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-1

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Entering Well Data


This section shows the process of creating a new Design and entering
general well data, pore pressure/fracture gradient/geothermal gradients,
pressure and fracture and geothermal gradients in the StressCheck
software. Next, a simple casing scheme is defined, and then the data can
be viewed graphically in a Well Schematic.

Creating a New Design


To create a new Design, select a wellbore and right-click, then select
New Design. The Design Properties dialog box opens.

Design Properties Dialog Box


The Design Properties dialog box is used to create a new Design and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the Design.
This dialog box contains three tabs: General and Audit info and
Change History.

5-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

General Tab (Design Properties Dialog Box)


Use the General tab to specify a unique design name that identifies the
design, and to provide additional information related to the design. This
tab is also used to lock the design and/or associated data to protect
against undesired changes to the data associated with the Design. A
Design name is required. Additional information in this dialog box is
used for informational and reporting purposes and is not required.
The following fields are present:
In the Details section:

Design - Type the name that will be used to identify the Design.
The name must be unique.
Note
If the Design is locked check box is selected, you cannot edit any of the fields.

Version - Type the version of the Design.

Phase - Select the phase of the Design from the pull-down list
(Prototype, Planned, or Actual). The list of phases that appears in
the combo box is filtered; you can only have one Design marked as
Planned and one marked as Actual. The Planned or Actual
option is removed from the pull-down list if another Design for the
same Wellbore already has it set. You can have as many Prototype
(the default) Designs as desired.

Effective Date - Select the date from the pull-down list. A calendar
dialog box will open. Use the arrow buttons in the calendar dialog
box to move to the desired month, and then click the day. The date
you select populates the field.
Click arrows to
change to
desired month.

Click on the
desired day.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-3

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

In the Depth Reference section:


Select the Depth Reference datum you want to use for this Design from
the pull-down list of Depth Reference datums that were defined at the
Well level. All other fields are display-only or calculated:

Datum Elevation - This shows a read-only display of the elevation


entered for the selected Depth Reference datum (set in the Well
Properties dialog box).

Air Gap (MSL) or (Ground) - Air Gap is calculated from MSL


and displayed. Air Gap is the distance from ground level/sea level
to the rig floor. It is used in some calculations for hydrostatic head.
The application calculates Air Gap as follows:
(Air Gap, Offshore Wells) = Datum Elevation Elevation (of
the System Datum relative to Mean Sea Level).
(Air Gap, Land Wells) = Datum Elevation Ground Level
(relative to MSL).
Elevation and Ground Level are set on the Depth Reference tab in
the Well Properties dialog box.
Datum Elevation is the elevation for the Depth Reference Datum.
Datum Elevation is always positive. If you change the datum
selection, the Air Gap updates automatically.
Note
If you change the datum and it causes a negative air gap to be calculated, a
warning message appears to inform you that you cannot select this datum.

5-4

[System Datum] - This is the current System Datum.

Mudline Depth (MSL) - (Offshore only) This is the distance from


MSL to the sea bed, which is Water Depth Elevation (System
Datum offset from MSL), which is set in the Project Properties
dialog box.

Mudline TVD - (Offshore only) This is the distance from the


Depth Reference Datum to the sea bed (datum Elevation +
Water Depth).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Select the Design is locked check box to prevent editing of the Design
data. If this check box is selected and a Locked Data password has been
specified, you will be prompted for the password before you can
deselect this check box. For more information, see Data Locking on
page 3-11.

Audit Info Tab (Design Properties Dialog Box)


The Audit tab displays when the Design was created, the last
modification date, and the person who changed the data. Audit tabs are
available on all data node properties dialog boxes.
You can track modification of data by using the Audit Info tab in the
Properties dialog box for each data type. Using the Well Explorer,
right-click on Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, or Design, and
then click the Audit Info tab.
This information
indicates who
modified the
Company,
Project, Site,
Well, Wellbore,
Design, and so
on. Also
displayed is the
date the item
was modified
and the
application that
was used to
modify the item.

This information indicates who created the


Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore,
Design, and so on. Also displayed is the
date the item was created and the
application that was used to create the item.

Enter
comments as
desired to assist
with tracking the
use of the
software. New
comments are
appended to
existing
comments.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-5

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Change History Tab (Design Properties Dialog Box)


The Change History tab provides historical audit information related to
Wellbores, Designs, and Cases in the associated Properties dialog
boxes. The Change History tab is populated by Engineers Desktop
applications whenever additions, deletions, or modifications to design
entered data are made. Specifically, changes are recorded when a user
adds to, updates, deletes, runs (WELLPLAN and COMPASS
software only), and copies data within EDM.

Note
Use Change History Logging systems setting in the EDM Administration Utility to
enable or disable the recording of Change History. See EDM Administration
Utility Help for details.

Entering General Well Information


Select the Wellbore > General > Options tab to specify:

5-6

A description of the well

Well depth (MD)

Vertical section definition and local reference information (when


the well is deviated)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information


Select the
Comments
tab to enter
additional
Well
information
such as
location.
Comments
are
optional.

Well Depth is
required to access
most of the
remaining data
entry forms. The
depth should be
greater than or
equal to the shoe
of the deepest
string defined in
the Wellbore >
Casing and
Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet.

Field and Controls

Description
The Description can include general remarks about the Well, such as the
name, field, and lease. This description is included on the bottom of all
printed documents if the Headers and Footers check box is selected in
the Tools > Options dialog box.

Well Depth (MD)


The Well Depth is the along-hole measured depth (MD) of the Well.
This depth should be greater than or equal to the shoe of the deepest
string defined in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet. When the well depth is defined as a depth greater than the
setting depth for the last casing (or liner) string, the assumption of
drill-out in the resulting final open-hole interval is made in the
formulation of load cases.
This depth is required as a reference point for automatically generating
data, such as the undisturbed temperature, pore pressure, fracture
pressure, and wellbore deviation profiles. It is also used to determine
whether drilling loads will be enabled for a selected string in the
Tubular > Burst Loads and Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog boxes.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-7

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Origin N
The Origin N value describes the North distance from the wellhead to
the local origin. The default value for Origin N is 0.0 (the wellhead is
positioned at the local origin). Non-zero values for Origin N cause a
displacement of the wellpath origin (wellhead) from the local origin
(plot origin) on View > Deviation Plots > Section View and View >
Deviation Plots > Plan View deviation plots. It also affects the
VSection data in the Survey Editor spreadsheet; positive values for
Origin N indicate North displacements from wellhead to local origin,
while negative values indicate South displacements.

Origin E
The Origin E value describes the East distance from the wellhead to the
local origin. The default value for Origin E is 0.0 (the wellhead is
positioned at the local origin). Non-zero values for Origin E cause a
displacement of the wellpath origin (wellhead) from the local origin
(plot origin) on View > Deviation Plots > Section View and View >
Deviation Plots > Plan View deviation plots. It also affects the
VSection data in the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet; positive
values for Origin E indicate East displacements from wellhead to local
origin, while negative values indicate West displacements.

Azimuth
The Azimuth value describes the orientation of a vertical plane onto
which the wellpath vertical section is projected. The default value for
Azimuth is 0.0 (due north).

Entering Pore Pressure Data


Select the Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet to define the pore
pressure or gradient profile as a function of true vertical depth. This data
is used to calculate external pressure profiles and to provide default
values for load cases specified in the Burst Loads and Collapse Loads
dialog boxes. This spreadsheet is always included in the Wizard list.

5-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Pressures can only be entered on a TVD


basis and can be specified as either a
pressure or an equivalent mud weight
(EMW). The StressCheck software
automatically calculates the other value.

You can specify the


location of permeable
zones on this form. The
base of the zone is
assumed to be the depth
of the next data point.
Permeable zone data can
be used to calculate
external pressure profiles.

Enter pore pressure


data from top down on
this spreadsheet.

The pore pressure profile can be viewed graphically by using View >
Formation Plots > Pore Pressure or View > Formation Plots > Pore,
Fracture & MW Plot. In the latter case, pore pressure is characterized
as an effective mud weight (EMW) gradient.

Pore Pressure Spreadsheet Columns


Abrupt escalations or regressions in the pore pressure profile can be
established by entering two depths separated by one depth unit on
successive lines, along with respective pore pressure or EMW entries.

Vertical Depth
Use the Vertical Depth cell to specify a TVD (true vertical depth)
corresponding to a given pore pressure. Between depth entries, the pore
pressure profile is constructed by linear interpolation.
The Vertical Depth cell for the first line is initialized to the depth
corresponding to MGL (mean ground level) for land wells, or the depth
corresponding to ML (mudline) for platform and subsea wells. It reflects
the System Datum set in the Project Properties dialog box and
elevation specifications set on the General tab of the Well Properties
dialog box.

Pore Pressure
Use the Pore Pressure cell to specify a pore pressure corresponding to a
TVD in the Vertical Depth cell. When a value is changed in the Pore

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-9

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Pressure cell, the EMW cell value is automatically calculated, and


vice versa.

EMW
Use the EMW cell to specify an effective mud weight pore pressure
gradient corresponding to a TVD in the Vertical Depth cell. When a
value is changed in the EMW cell, the value in the Pore Pressure cell
value is automatically calculated, and vice versa.

Permeable Zones
The Permeable Zone cell is used in association with the external
pressure method for burst or collapse load generation. If the wellbore is
exposed to a permeable zone at the specified depth, click Yes for the
setting in this cell. When selected, the permeable zone begins at the
depth for the entry and continues until the next specified depth in the
Wellbore > Pore Pressure spreadsheet.

Entering Fracture Gradient Data


Select the Wellbore > Fracture Gradient spreadsheet to define the
fracture pressure or gradient profile as a function of true vertical depth.
The fracture pressure profile can be viewed graphically using View >
Formation Plots > Fracture Gradient Plot or View > Formation
Plots > Pore, Fracture & MW Plot. In the View > Formation Plots >
Pore, Fracture & MW Plot, fracture pressure is characterized as an
EMW gradient.
Pressures can only be entered on a TVD basis and can be specified as
either a pressure or an equivalent mud weight (EMW). The StressCheck
software automatically calculates the other value.

Enter fracture gradient


data from top down on
this spreadsheet.

5-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Note
The data entered on the Fracture Gradient spreadsheet are used as boundary
conditions in the calculation of certain external pressure profiles and to provide
default values for load cases specified in the Tubular > Burst Loads and
Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog boxes.

Fracture Gradient Spreadsheet Columns


Abrupt escalations or regressions in the fracture gradient profile can be
established by entry of two depths separated by one depth unit on
successive lines, along with respective fracture pressure or
EMW entries.

Vertical Depth
Use this cell to specify a TVD (True Vertical Depth) corresponding to a
given fracture pressure. Between depth entries, the fracture pressure
profile is constructed by linear interpolation. Abrupt escalations or
regressions in the fracture pressure profile can be established by
entering two depths separated by one depth unit on successive lines,
along with respective fracture pressure or EMW entries. The Vertical
Depth cell for the first line in this spreadsheet is initialized to the depth
corresponding to MGL (mean ground level) for land wells, or the depth
corresponding to ML (mudline) for platform and subsea wells. It reflects
the System Datum set on the General tab of the Project Properties
dialog box and elevation specifications on the Depth Reference tab of
the Well Properties dialog box.

Fracture Pressure
Use the Frac Pressure cell to specify a fracture pressure corresponding
to a TVD in the Vertical Depth cell. When a value is entered or changed
in the Fracture Pressure cell, the value in the EMW cell is automatically
calculated, and vice versa.

EMW
Use the EMW cell to specify an effective mud weight fracture pressure
gradient corresponding to a TVD in the Vertical Depth cell. When a
value is entered or changed in the EMW cell, the value in the Fracture
Pressure cell is automatically calculated, and vice versa.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-11

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Defining a Squeezing Salt/Shale Zone


Select the Wellbore > Squeezing Salt/Shale spreadsheet to define
squeezing salt or shale sections for collapse design. This spreadsheet is
used to enter collapse loads due to formations, such as salt zones that
exhibit plastic flow or creep behavior. Over the depth interval(s) for
which they are specified, these loads will replace the external pressure
profile specified in the Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog box. The
external collapse load is normally assumed to be equal to the overburden
pressure and this load is applied uniformly to the pipe OD.
To define a zone, the Zone TVD and Base
TVD values are required. Data is only
entered for TVD values, either as a
pressure or a pressure gradient/EMW.

If no specific pressures are


known, then 1.0 psi/ft is
used through the salt zone.

Pressures must be specified at both the top and base of a zone. The
pressures at intermediate depths within a zone are determined by
linear interpolation.

Squeezing Salt/Shale Spreadsheet Columns

Zone Top
Use the Zone Top TVD cell to specify the TVD (true vertical depth) to
the top of the salt zone. The portion of the string exposed to this high
collapse load is defined by the values specified for Zone Top and
Zone Base.

Zone Base
Use the Base TVD cell to specify the TVD (true vertical depth)
corresponding to the base of the salt zone. The portion of the string
exposed to this high collapse load is defined by the values specified for
Zone Top and Zone Base.

5-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Overburden Pressure at Top, (psi)


Use the Overburden Pressure at Top (psi) cell to specify the collapse
pressure to which the string will be exposed at the top of the zone. When
data in this cell is entered or changed, the corresponding value in the
(ppg) cell is automatically calculated, and vice versa.

Overburden Pressure at Top, (ppg)


Use the Overburden Pressure at Top (ppg) cell to specify the collapse
effective mud weight gradient to which the string will be exposed at the
top of the zone. When data in this cell is entered or changed, the
corresponding value in the (psi) cell is automatically calculated, and
vice versa.

Overburden Pressure at Base, (psi)


Use the Overburden Pressure at Base (psi) cell to specify the collapse
pressure to which the string will be exposed at the base of the zone.
When data in this cell is entered or changed, the corresponding value in
the (ppg) cell is automatically calculated, and vice versa.

Overburden Pressure at Base, (ppg)


Use the Overburden Pressure at Base (ppg) cell to specify the collapse
pressure to which the string will be exposed at the base of the zone.
When data in this cell is entered or changed, the corresponding value in
the (psi) cell is automatically calculated, and vice versa.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-13

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Managing Wellpath Data


Entering Wellpath Data
Select the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet to define a
wellbore trajectory description for planar and three-dimensional
directional wells.
The three preferred methods
(MD-INC-AZ, INC-AZ-TVD,
and INC-AZ-DLS) can be
used in any combination at
different depths.

For all data entry types, a larger dogleg can be specified in the
Max Dogleg field for build and drop sections. These Max Doglegs
are utilized in bending analysis. Additional doglegs can be
specified on the Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides
(independent of deviation) spreadsheet. Maximum Dogleg values
do not affect the well trajectory.

When data values are entered, calculation of those values not entered is performed.

StressCheck versions prior to V3.1 used direct linear interpolation


between depths in the wellpath trajectory definition in order to map MD
and TVD at particular depths that are points-of-interest from a
computational point-of-view, a methodology with inherent error
(particularly for sparse well trajectory definitions). With
implementation of the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor, the StressCheck
software now uses minimum curvature interpolation for all point-ofinterest mapping of MD and TVD, except where the MD-TVD data
input format has been used.
There are three preferred methods used to specify a well profile. These
methods are used in the preceding example. These can be used in any
combination at different depths:

5-14

Measured Depth, Inclination, and Azimuth (MD-INC-AZ)


Inclination, Azimuth, and True Vertical Depth (INC-AZ-TVD)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Inclination, Azimuth, and Dogleg Severity (INC-AZ-DLS)

Note
You must use type 1 (MD-INC-AZ) as the starting type, and not INC-AZ-TVD
or INC-AZ-DLS types.

There is a fourth data entry method that cannot be mixed with the
previous three:

Measured Depth and True Vertical depth pairs. Any attempt to mix
this type with the other types will produce a warning message.
Note
Because the MD-TVD method does not calculate dogleg severity, stress
calculations are not performed.

Import Wellpath File


Select File > Import > Wellpath to open the Import Wellpath File
dialog box. It is used to import and load delimited text survey files
created by a different program (for example, the Landmark COMPASS
software) into the Wellpath Editor.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-15

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

File format
must be ASCII
text, and it
must be
formatted as
specified
below.

The format for survey files to be imported into the Wellbore >
Wellpath Editor with this utility command are indicated below.

The file must be tabular delimited text, and use any combination of
spaces, tabs, or commas as field delimiters.

Column 1 is reserved for measured depth, and measured depth


values must be in increasing order and positive values.

Column 2 is reserved for inclination.

Column 3 is reserved for azimuth, and azimuth values must be


0.0 < AZ < 360.0.

Dogleg Severity Overrides Spreadsheet


Select the Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides spreadsheet to
define intervals of wellbore curvature independent of the deviation
profile defined in the Survey Editor. This spreadsheet is used to enter
dogleg severity (DLS) data, as a function of measured depth interval,
that will be used (if greater) to override DLS or Max DLS data in the
Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet for the purpose of bending
stress calculation.

5-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Additional tension due to bending is superimposed onto the axial load profile
based on the maximum local value of doglegs specified on this form and the
Wellbore > Wellpath Editor spreadsheet.

Dogleg Severity Overrides can be used to include consideration of


bending in vertical wells.

Dogleg Severity Overrides Spreadsheet Columns

Top
Use the Top cell to specify the measured depth at which the interval for
which the dogleg severity override will apply begins.

Base
Use the Base cell to specify the measured depth at which the interval for
which the dogleg severity override will apply ends.

Dogleg Severity
Use the DLS cell to specify a dogleg severity override to be used over
the measured depth interval defined by Top and Base.
Note
The DLS intervals specified in Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides can overlap
intervals for which DLS and Max DLS are defined in the Wellbore > Wellpath
Editor spreadsheet. At any depth, the greater of the three will prevail in the
determination of bending stress. Dogleg Severity Overrides will be reflected, where
they prevail over other local DLS definitions (DLS or Max DLS in the Survey
Editor spreadsheet), in the View > Deviation Plots > Dogleg Severity Profile plot.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-17

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Viewing the Dogleg Overrides Graphically


You can view the dogleg severity overrides using the View > Deviation
Plots > Dogleg Severity Profile plot.

5-18

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Defining the Geothermal Gradient


Select the Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient > Standard tab to specify
basic formation temperature data.

The Mudline field displays only when the


Offshore check box is selected in the
Well Properties dialog box.

The default values are 80 F at the surface, 40 F at the mudline, and a


1.5 F/100 ft gradient to the well TD. You can add additional
intermediate temperature points on the Wellbore > Geothermal
Gradient > Additional tab.
Use the Additional tab to specify
additional formation temperature which
can be used to characterize a more
complex formation.

Fields and Controls

Surface Ambient
The Surface Ambient temperature for an onshore well is the temperature
at MGL. For an offshore well (select the Offshore check box in the Well
Properties dialog box), the surface ambient temperature represents the

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-19

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

air temperature above MSL. The default surface ambient temperature is


80 F.

Mudline
The Mudline temperature field displays if the Offshore check box is
selected in the Well Properties dialog box. The water temperature
profile will be linear between the surface ambient temperature at MSL
and the specified temperature at the mudline. The default mudline
temperature is 40 F.
Temperature at Well TD Options

Temperature
The temperature at the well TD can be explicitly specified or calculated
from a gradient specification. To enter the value explicitly, select the
Temperature option and enter the temperature at the TVD
corresponding to the well TD. The well TD is specified on the
Wellbore > General > Options tab as MD, but it is displayed on this
tab as TVD for convenient reference.
The Temperature and Gradient options are mutually exclusive. The
Temperature field is disabled if the Gradient option is selected, and
vice versa.
The default temperature value at the well TD is computed using a 1.5 F/
100 ft gradient. If the Temperature option is selected, the calculated
gradient changes with variation in temperature at the surface for an
onshore well or mudline for an offshore well, a change in TVD at the
mudline or well TD, or a change in wellbore deviation.

Gradient
The temperature at the well TD can be calculated from a gradient or
specified explicitly. To calculate the value from a gradient, select the
Gradient option and enter the gradient value. The temperature at the
well TD is then calculated based on the gradient and the surface ambient
temperature at MGL for an onshore well, or the mudline temperature at
the mudline depth for an offshore well.
The default gradient is 1.5 F/100 ft. If the Gradient option is selected,
the calculated temperature changes with variation of temperature at the

5-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

surface for an onshore well or mudline for an offshore well, a change in


TVD at the mudline or well TD, or a change in wellbore deviation.

What Effect Does Temperature Have on the Analysis?


Changing the temperature profile affects the worst-case temperature
profiles calculated for each burst and collapse load case.
Temperatures have the following effects in the StressCheck software:

Influence axial load distributions for all burst and collapse loads
based on an undisturbed initial temperature and a worst-case
temperature profile.

Derate yield strength, and therefore, the pipe rating. To include


temperature deration, select the Temperature Deration check box
on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab.

Influence the temperature and dependent gas density profiles in


some burst load cases.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-21

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Define the Casing and Tubing Scheme


Select the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet to
create and modify the preliminary well design. Each row specifies basic
information about a single casing string.
Pipes should be entered in
the order in which they are
run in the well (for example,
The pipe Name and Type
Conductor, Surface,
Intermediate, and so on with pull-down lists contain
industry-standard terms.
respect to their Outer
Diameter).

The default Hanger depths for casing


and tieback strings are based on
whether the well is an onshore, offshore
platform, or subsea well. The hanger
depths can be modified.

The Hole Size pull-down list contains


common bit sizes that can be modified
or added to by selecting Tools >
Defaults > Bit Sizes.

The Mud at Shoe


density field contains
the density values of the
mud in which the casing
string was run
and cemented.

The OD pull-down list is


populated by the ODs in the
current Tubular > Pipe
Inventory spreadsheet.

The data entered on this spreadsheet is used to provide default values


when specifying load cases in the Tubular > Burst Loads, Tubular >
Collapse Loads, and Tubular > Axial Loads dialog boxes, and when
graphically designing casing strings in the View > Design Plots > Burst
Design, View > Design Plots > Collapse Design, View > Design Plots
> Axial Design, and View > Design Plots > Triaxial Design plots.

5-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

To enter and modify more detailed data about each string, use the
commands under the Tubular menu. To view the casing scheme
graphically, use View > Well Schematic.
Note
Production load cases can only be specified for strings whose Name has been
designated as Production.

Fields and Controls

OD (Outer Diameter)
This cell has a pull-down list that has all ODs found in the pipe
inventory. If the required OD is not in this list, at least one pipe with this
OD must be added to the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet.
Note
The StressCheck software permits the entry of tapered (multiple OD) strings.
However, tapered strings cannot be specified explicitly on this spreadsheet. To
design a tapered string, use the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet to add
additional detail to the string design following the entry of the OD of the smallest
tapered string on the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

Name
The Name cell is used for reference and to determine applicable load
cases. For this reason, it must be selected from the choices on the
pull-down list for the cell. The available choices are Conductor, Surface,
Intermediate, Drilling, Protective, and Production. For a particular
string, you must select Production to enable most production loads on
the Tubular > Burst Loads and Tubular > Collapse Loads
dialog boxes.

Type
Use the Type cell to open a list containing casing, liner, and tieback
string types. The Type selection dictates default values used on this
spreadsheet and when selecting load cases in the Tubular > Burst
Loads and Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog boxes.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-23

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

When the Casing or Tieback types are specified, the Hanger cell is
immediately assigned a default value. This feature is provided to help
ensure data consistency, but the hanger depth default can be
subsequently modified; the default hanger depth is intended to closely
approximate the depth of the wellhead.
For onshore wells, the default depth is the depth corresponding to MGL
(that is, the elevation value specified in the Project Properties dialog
box). The default depth is zero for platform wells and the mudline depth
for subsea wells. For strings of type Liner, the hanger depth cell remains
undefined until a value is entered.
Note
If the Type cell contents are modified after data is entered in the Hanger cell, the
contents of the Hanger cell may automatically change to maintain data consistency.
For example, if a casing or tieback is changed to a liner, the Hanger cell is
automatically cleared, and requires the entry of a hanger depth. Similarly, if a liner
is changed to a casing or tieback, the previously entered hanger depth is also
changed to the default wellhead depth.

Hole Size
Use the Hole Size cell to specify an open hole size greater than the
diameter specified in the OD cell. The Hole Size cell contains a
pull-down list having common bit sizes, which are specified in the Tools
> Defaults > Bit Sizes dialog box. The list of available hole sizes can be
supplemented with entries in the Bit Sizes dialog box.
This cell is disabled if Tieback is specified in the Type cell for the string,
because tiebacks are not run in open hole.

5-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Hanger
Use the Hanger cell to specify the depth corresponding to the top of the
string. When the Casing or Tieback types are specified, the Hanger cell
is immediately assigned a default value. This feature is provided to help
ensure data consistency, but the hanger depth default may be
subsequently modified. For casing and tiebacks, the default hanger
depth is intended to closely approximate the depth of the wellhead. For
onshore wells, the default hanger depth is the depth corresponding to
MGL (that is, the elevation value specified in the Project Properties
dialog box). The default depth is zero for platform wells and the mudline
depth for subsea wells. For strings of type Liner, the Hanger cell remains
undefined until a value is entered.
Note
The contents of the Hanger cell may automatically change to maintain data
consistency if the content of the Type cell is altered. For additional information,
refer to the discussion on the Type cell.

Shoe
Use the Shoe cell to specify the depth corresponding to the base of the
casing string. For a tieback, a shoe depth must be specified that
corresponds to the hanger depth for a liner.

TOC (Top of Cement)


Use the TOC cell to specify the top of cement (TOC) that will affect the
external pressure profile, the axial load profile for service loads, and the
triaxial analysis. For a fully cemented string, set the TOC value equal to
the depth specified in the Hanger cell. For a partially cemented string,
set the TOC value greater (deeper) than the hanger depth.
Note
For an uncemented string, set the TOC value equal to the string shoe depth. Do not
specify a value less than hanger depth for any string.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-25

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Mud at Shoe
Use the Mud at Shoe cell to specify the density of the mud in which the
casing string was run and cemented. This density is used to calculate a
hydrostatic external pressure profile outside the casing above TOC. It is
also used in certain burst and collapse load cases as the mud density used
during drilling below the prior string. Deteriorated mud densities can be
specified on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Options and Tubular >
Collapse Loads > Options tabs.

Note
The mud at the shoe is the mud in which the casing string was run. If a different
density fluid is used to displace the cement during the cement job, enter this fluid
on the Tubular >Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab.

5-26

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Well Schematic
Select View > Well Schematic to display a graphical representation that
characterizes the casing strings and other information specified on the
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. This schematic
can also be displayed in any tab by selecting it from the View menu.
The Well Schematic can be plotted as a
function of either MD or TVD.

For this
example,
select the 9
5/8
production
casing. You
can select it
by selecting
it from the
pull-down
list or by
highlighting
it on the
schematic.

To display
cement, rightclick the
schematic,
and select
Properties.
In the Well
Schematic
Properties
dialog box,
select the
Cement
check box,
and click OK.

The current casing string is highlighted in red. The name, OD, and shoe
depth are shown at the shoe of each string. Most commands found under
the Tubular menu apply only to the current string.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-27

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

To select a casing string for Design or analysis, click the string section.
Alternatively, use the Wizard toolbar pull-down list of casing strings, or
select Tubular > Current String.

Defining Production Data


Select the Wellbore > Production Data dialog box to specify the
packer depth and packer fluid density as well as the perforation depth
and properties of the produced fluid. This information is used when
defining the internal pressure profiles for production load cases in the
Tubular > Burst Loads and Tubular > Collapse Loads dialog boxes.

Fields and Controls

Fluid Density
Use the Fluid Density field to specify the density of the packer fluid. To
facilitate what-if investigations and the construction of worst-case
collapse load scenarios, the packer fluid density specified here can be
independently overridden for the production collapse load case by
selecting the Above/Below Packer check box on the Tubular >
Collapse Loads > Edit tab. The default value is 8.60 ppg
(seawater density).

Packer Depth
Use the Packer Depth field to enter the measured depth the packer will
be set in a production casing or liner. The default value is the well depth
specified on the Wellbore > General > Options tab.

5-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Perforation Depth, MD
Use the Perforation Depth field to enter the measured depth of the
perforations. The default value is the well depth specified on the
Wellbore > General > Options tab.

Gas Gravity
Select Gas Gravity to use it as the means for gas density
characterization. When Gas Gravity is used, a temperature-dependent
and pressure-dependent compressibility factor is determined based on a
simple gas composition for the specified gravity. This compressibility
factor is used to calculate a gas density profile and surface pressure if the
Tubing Leak load case is selected in the Tubular > Burst Loads dialog
box. The default value of 0.70 is used for gas gravity.

Gas/Oil Gradient
When Gas/Oil Gradient is selected as the means for gas density
characterization, the specified gradient is used to calculate the surface
pressure when the Tubing Leak load case is selected on the Tubular >
Burst Loads > Edit tab. The default value of 0.1 psi/ft is used for the
gas/oil gradient.

Setting Up Tabs
Tabs allow you to view text and graphical data in multiple window
layers. These results may be organized in logical groups. Select the
Tools > Tabs dialog box to set up Tabs.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-29

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Tabs can be created, deleted, renamed, and ordered from the Tabs
dialog box on the View menu.
The Lock Tab check box disables the Delete and Rename buttons and
places a small Lock icon on the tab. After a tab is locked, the contents
of the view cannot be changed. Any user can unlock a locked tab.

Splitting Windows into Panes


Each tab can be split into panes. You can change the size of the pane as
needed. Plots and spreadsheets can be opened in the panes. Panes are
used in the StressCheck software to place input and output data for quick
reference and printing.

Use this bar


to split the
window
horizontally.

Use this bar to split the window vertically.

The maximum number of panes set horizontally or vertically is two.

5-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

Splitting the Tab into Vertical Panes

Double-click the split button located on the far left of the horizontal
scroll bar.

Alternatively, you can drag the vertical splitter bar into position
using the mouse.

By default, the well schematic always appears in a new pane.

Splitting the Tab into Horizontal Panes

Double-click the split button located on the top right of the


vertical scroll bar.

Alternatively, you can drag the horizontal splitter bar into


position by using the mouse.

Changing the Contents of the Pane


To change the contents of the pane, select the pane by clicking inside it.
Then, select the spreadsheet, table, or plot you want to display from the
menu bar.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

5-31

Chapter 5: Well and Formation Information

5-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6

Tubular Load Data


Now you have entered all the general and formation information. The Wizard has grown to the
maximum size, allowing you to continue to enter the specific tubular and loading information for
the casing you wish to design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-1

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Entering Design Parameters


Use Tubular > Design Parameters > Design Factor to specify tubular
design factors and analysis options. This data is used in the definition of
load cases and in the control of design and analysis logic.

Enter the Pipe


Design Factors
as specified
here.

Connection
design factors
are optional
and default to
the default pipe
body values if
left blank.

Select these
options for this
section of the
training.

Min Internal
Drift diameter
defaults based
on the next hole
OD defined in
Wellbore >
Casing and
Tubing
Scheme.
No pipe with a
Min Internal
Drift diameter
smaller than the
value shown
here will be

6-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Design parameters are defined for the Current String, and can therefore
be specified independently for each string defined in the Casing Scheme
spreadsheet. To change the currently selected string, use Tubular >
Current String or the Select String pull-down list on the
Wizard toolbar.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-3

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Specifying the Initial Conditions


Select the Tubular > Initial Conditions dialog box to define initial
conditions for the current string to be used with load cases selected in
the Tubular > Burst Loads, Tubular > Collapse Loads, and
Tubular > Axial Loads (service loads only) dialog boxes. You
can define:

Cementing and landing conditions, such as fluid densities, applied


surface pressure, whether the float failed, and pickup and
slackoff forces

Initial-condition temperature profiles (default or user-defined)

This data is used to define load cases, determine the initial state of the
casing, and dictate design and analysis logic.
Initial conditions data is defined on a per-string basis; that is, different
initial conditions data can be defined for each string in the Casing
Scheme spreadsheet. To change strings, use the Tubular > Current
String dialog box or the Select String pull-down list on the Wizard
toolbar. The Cementing and Landing and Temperature tabs are used
to specify these conditions.

Defining Cementing and Landing Data


Cementing and landing data are entered on the Tubular > Initial
Conditions > Cement and Landing tab to establish, for the current
string, the post-cementing hydrostatic profile for certain burst (for
example, Green Cement Pressure Test), collapse (for example,
Cementing), and axial (for example, Post-Cement Static) load cases.
Also use it to establish hydrostatic and applied loads for cemented and
landed casing as an initial condition to subsequent loads and
displacements that may develop from load cases selected on the

6-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Tubular > Burst Loads > Select, Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select,
and Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tabs.
Initial conditions are entered on a per string basis.

The default Mix-water


Density is based on
fresh water.

The default slurry


densities are based
on Class G
neat cement.

The default
Displacement Fluid
Density and Float
Collar Depth values are
based on data entered
on the Wellbore >
Casing and Tubing
Scheme spreadsheet.

This data is defined on a per-string basis. Different Cementing and


Landing data can be defined for each string in the Wellbore > Casing
and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. To change strings, use the Tubular >
Current String dialog box or the Select String pull-down list on the
Wizard toolbar.
The Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cement and Landing tab is
always accessible from the Wizard List by using the Tubular > Initial
Conditions dialog box.

Fields

Mix-Water Density
Enter the density of the mix-water used to prepare lead and (if selected)
tail cement slurries for single-stage primary cementation of the current
string. This fluid density is used in the formulation of certain burst- and
collapse-load external profiles over cemented intervals (for example,

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-5

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Mud and Cement Mix-Water, and Permeable Zones). The default value
for Mix-Water Density is 8.33 ppg.

Lead Slurry Density


Enter the density of the lead cement slurry used for single-stage primary
cementation of the current string. This fluid density is used in the
formulation for determining the initial axial load distribution of the
current string after cement placement, but before applying pickup or
slackoff landing loads.
The length of the cemented interval is established separately by the
specification of Top of Cement (TOC) for the current string in the
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.
The default value for lead slurry density is 15.8 ppg (neat API Class
G cement).

Tail Slurry Density


Select the Tail Slurry Density check box if both lead and tail slurries
are used for single-stage primary cementation of the current string, and
enter the tail slurry density. The Tail Slurry Length must also be
specified. The length of the lead slurry is established separately by the
specification of TOC for the current string in the Wellbore > Casing
and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. These values, along with the lead
slurry density, are used in the formulation for determining the initial
axial load distribution of the current string after cement placement, but
before application of pick-up or slack-off landing loads.
The Tail Slurry Length field is disabled if this check box is not
selected.

Tail Slurry Length


Use the Tail Slurry Length field to enter the final placement length of
the tail slurry column if both lead and tail slurries are used for singlestage primary cementation of the current string. This value is used in the
formulation for determining the initial axial load distribution of the
current string after cement placement, but before application of pick-up
or slack-off landing loads.
The Tail Slurry Length field is disabled if the Tail Slurry Density
check box is not selected.

6-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Displacement Fluid Density


Enter the Displacement Fluid Density used for single-stage primary
cementation of the current string. Normally, the fluid used to displace
the cement slurry during such a cement job is the drilling mud in which
the current string was run. The default value for this field is, therefore,
taken from the current-string entry for Mud at Shoe in the Wellbore >
Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.
An alternative value can be specified when required. Low-density
displacement fluids, such as seawater, can have a significant effect on
the initial axial load distribution (due to the piston force on the float
collar) as well as the collapse load imparted to the current string.

Float Collar Depth


Enter the MD of the float collar. The default value is the current-string
shoe depth taken from the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing
Scheme spreadsheet.

Applied Surface Pressure


Select the Applied Surface Pressure check box and enter the required
pressure if surface pressure will be applied to the current string after
bumping the upper plug and held for the duration of the wait-on-cement
(WOC) period. If it is not selected, the corresponding data field
is disabled.
The application of surface pressure during the WOC period is used to
pretension the string when a pickup force cannot be applied before
landing the string in the wellhead. This typically occurs in applications
where a mandrel-type casing hanger is used (for example, a subsea well
or a production casing string in a high-pressure well). The desired
pretensioning is only achieved where wellbore-casing friction forces do
not prevent the required axial displacement. For wellbore inclinations
where casing will not slide of its own weight (generally, greater than 65
to 70 degrees), the ability to develop the desired axial displacement
requires validation.
To avoid data compatibility problems, the Float Failed check box is
deselected when the Applied Surface Pressure check box is selected,
and vice versa.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-7

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Float Failed
If the Float Failed check box is selected, the differential pressure
normally developed across the float collar (due to the hydrostatic
disequilibrium between fluids inside and outside the casing) will instead
be held as a casing back-pressure at the surface in order to prevent
U-tubing of cement back inside the casing from the annulus.
This option should normally be selected only for sensitivity analysis
after an otherwise satisfactory design for the current casing string has
been obtained.
To avoid data compatibility problems, the Applied Surface Pressure
check box is disabled if the Float Failed check box is selected, and
vice versa.

Pickup Force
Select the Pickup Force option to enter a pickup force. Pickup force is
the incremental upward force (above static string weight) applied to the
casing string at the surface before landing the string in a slip-type casing
hanger within the wellhead. Applied after the cement has hardened, the
pickup force results in increased tension above the TOC depth, as
specified for the current string in the Casing Scheme spreadsheet. The
axial load profile below the TOC remains unchanged by a pickup force
specification. The force is only considered in axial design when the
Service Loads check box is selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads >
Select tab.
This force is typically applied to prevent thermal or hydrostatic induced
buckling while drilling below the current string, or during subsequent
production operations. If the Buckling check box is selected on the
Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab, buckling
results are available in the View > Tabular Results > Triaxial Results

6-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

table, including the required pickup load to eliminate buckling for the
selected individual load case.

If buckling is a concern, the indicated pickup load requirement should


be evaluated by selecting the Pickup Force option to verify design
integrity under the increased axial loading.
To specify a pickup force, select the Pickup Force option and enter the
required upward force.
Note
Pickup force, as defined in this dialog box, is only considered in axial design when
the Service Loads check box is selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select
tab. The pickup force is independent of the Applied Force defined in the PreCement Static Load in the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab.

Slackoff Force
Select the Slackoff Force option to enter a slackoff force. Slackoff force
is a reduction to the current-string axial load profile, immediately after
cementing, by lowering of the casing before landing in the wellhead
assembly. This force results in reduced tension both above and below
the TOC depth, as specified for the current string in the Wellbore >
Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-9

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Slackoff force is only considered in axial design when the Service


Loads check box is selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select
tab.
This force is typically applied to land a tieback string in a liner-top
polished bore receptacle (PBR). The additional compression at the PBR
can serve several purposes, including:

energizing a metal seal.


providing sufficient compression to prevent seal movement in the
PBR during production or stimulation operations.
Note
The StressCheck software does not model the movement of uncemented tiebacks
in PBRs. Nevertheless, if the Buckling check box is selected in the Tubular >
Design Parameters dialog box, the effect of slackoff force on buckling above the
TOC only can be evaluated for a particular load case using the View > Tabular
Results > Triaxial Results table. To specify a slackoff force, select the Slackoff
Force option and enter the required reduction in axial force.

6-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Defining the Starting Temperature Profile


Select the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Temperature tab to specify
the starting temperature profile for the current string.
This data is defined on a per-string basis; therefore, different
initial-condition temperature data can be defined for each string in the
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

Select the Default


temperature to use the
temperature profile specified
using Wellbore >
Geothermal Gradient. Select
User-entered to define an
alternate temperature profile.

The following two temperature profiles are available.

Select Default to use the temperature profile entered in the


Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient dialog box.

Select User-entered to define an alternate temperature profile to


establish the cemented-and-landed initial condition that serves as
the baseline for assessing the effects on axial load profiles of
thermal strains. These strains may arise from temperature-profile
changes from the initial condition to that associated by default or
user entry with a particular burst or collapse load cases, or the axial
service-loads case.

This data is defined on a per-string basis; therefore, different


initial-condition temperature data can be defined for each string in the
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. To change

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-11

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

strings, use Tubular > Current String or the Select String pull-down
list on the Wizard toolbar.
Unlike temperature data in the Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient
dialog box, user-entered temperature data on the Temperature tab are
referenced to either MD or TVD.
Note
If you are copying temperature data from another source, be sure to verify whether
the data is based on MD or TVD. Before you copy the data into this tab, be sure you
have selected the correct option for MD or TVD.

6-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Specify Tool Passage Requirements


Select the Tubular > Tool Passage dialog box to determine the
maximum tool length for a specified tool OD, such that the tool (when
considered as a rigid body) can freely pass through the casing (based on
drift diameter) at the depth of greatest casing curvature. Alternatively,
tools of a specified OD and length can be entered to determine whether
they will pass through the casing under load conditions described in the
design load cases. The severity of bending and buckling can have an
effect on the ability of future tubulars to be freely run in the existing
casing or liner.
Enter the maximum length of the tool.

Enter the OD
of the tool.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-13

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

The View > Tabular Results > Tool Passage Summary


table displays the tool passage data entered in the Tool
Passage dialog box. The results reported in this tabular
summary are dynamic when Tool Passage Summary is
the current view and then the Tool Passage dialog box is
opened and data are entered or edited.

In this example, a 3.5 OD tool that is


100 ft long cannot pass in the well at
10,400 ft. The maximum tool length
that can pass through this section is
63.40 ft.

The minimum force


required for the tool to
pass is 19.37 lbf.

Tubular > Tool Passage dialog box.

Results are displayed as they are entered if the View > Tabular
Results > Tool Passage Summary window is open before using the
Tubular > Tool Passage dialog box.

6-14

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Defining Burst Loads


The Tubular > Burst Loads dialog box has several tabs to define burst
loads that will serve as the basis for the current strings burst design. The
design load line is determined from the aggregate worst-case burst
loading as a function of depth, with design factors and temperature
deration of minimum yield strength considered for all selected
burst loads.
Load case data specified in this dialog box are for the current string only.
Load cases must be selected and specified independently for each string
entered in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet. To
change strings, use the Tubular > Current String command or the
Select String pull-down list on the Wizard toolbar. The Burst Loads
dialog box always appears in the Wizard list.
The Tubular > Burst Loads dialog box has several tabs for defining
these data and viewing pressure profile results.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-15

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Selecting the Design Burst Loads and the External Pressure Profile
Use the Tubular > Burst Loads > Select tab to select the burst loads
you want to use in the design.
Production
loads can
be selected
only if the
casing
name is
production.

Drilling
loads can
be
selected if
the
casing
shoe is
shallower
than the
well TD.

This method
will be used
for all the
burst load
cases if a
Single
External
Pressure
Profile is
selected on
the Tubular
> Design
Parameters
> Analysis
Options tab.

All the
burst
loads are
discussed
in detail in
the online
help
system.

Defining the External Pressure Profile


For burst design, there are five methods of calculating external pressure
profiles. For information about external pressure profiles, refer to
External Pressure Profiles on page 2-50.

6-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Defining Burst Load Details


Use the Tubular > Burst Loads > Edit tab to specify or view
parameters for each load case and external pressure profile enabled on
the Tubular > Burst Loads > Select or Tubular > Burst Loads >
Custom tabs. These parameters are used to construct a specific load
case or external pressure profile. The parameters available vary
depending on the current load case selected.
Using the data of
this dialog box,
the StressCheck
software creates
an internal
pressure profile
consisting of the
maximum
pressure seen
by the casing
while circulating
a gas kick to the
surface.

Select
desired
burst load
or
pressure
profile
from the
drop-down
list.

BHA
dimensions
are used to
calculate
bubble height
as the kick is
circulated out
of the well.

The gas gravity and equivalent pressure


gradient in psi at the depth of the influx is based
on the Redlich-Kwong equation of state.

Using the Multiple tab


Use the Tubular > Burst Loads > Multiple tab to apply liner(s)
internal pressure test load(s) and external overlapped pressure profile(s)
as internal pressure profile to other associated liner(s), casing and
tieback strings set above the current string in the casing scheme.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-17

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Pressure test load cases from any liner can be shared. Tubing or tieback
pressure test load cases cannot be shared.

The Multiple tab displays a list of other strings (liners) having pressure
test loads that may apply to the current string. After a pressure test load
is associated to the current string other tabs, such as Edit,
Temperature, Plot and Option, will support the new pressure test load.
From the Multiple Tab, you can view details of a pressure test load
internal pressure profile and overlapped pressure profile intervals, and
can select an external pressure profile.
The pressure tests are named based on the source string name and type.
Each pressure test load is named by the string OD, function of the string,
and the load type (pressure test).

Constraints
Note how overlapping strings and user-defined temperature data are
handled for multiple loads:

6-18

Overlap: Intermediate liner(s) overlapped pressure profile intervals


will be ignored if the corresponding liner strings do not include a
pressure test load.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Temperature: Multiple loads pressure test applied to the string of


interest do not inherit user-entered temperature profile from the
source liner string.

Viewing the Associated External Pressure Profile


The data used in the remaining load cases or pressure profiles can be
accessed by selecting the pull-down list from the Tubular > Burst
Loads > Edit tab.

Select the desired


load case or
pressure profile
from the
pull-down list.

For every selected burst load case, an appropriate external pressure


profile must be selected so the StressCheck software will correctly

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-19

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

calculate the differential pressure. In this example, the Mud & Cement
Mix Water profile is used.
When the Single External Pressure Profile check box is selected on
the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab, the
selected external pressure will be used for all burst load cases

View the defining


parameters for the
external pressure profile
from this dialog box. All
load cases will use this
external pressure profile
because the Single
External Pressure
Profile check box was
selected on the Tubular >
Design Parameters >
Analysis Options tab.

Specify Burst Load Temperature


Select the Tubular > Burst Loads > Temperature tab to specify the
temperature profile you want to use for the load case selected in the pulldown list at the top of this tab. You can only select load cases enabled
in the Tubular > Burst Loads > Select or Tubular > Burst Loads >
Custom tabs. Select the Default option to use the temperature profile as
defined by the StressCheck software for that particular load case. Select
the User-entered option to define an alternate temperature profile.
Select the Geothermal option to use the temperature profile defined on

6-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

the Geothermal Gradient dialog box. You can only edit temperature
data if you select the User-entered option.

Select the Default


option to use the
temperature profile as
defined by the
StressCheck software
for that particular load
case.
Select the Userentered option to enter
your own temperature
data. This can be in the
form of output from the
WELLCAT program or
text file, either typed in
or pasted in from a text
or spreadsheet.
Select the Geothermal
option to use the
temperature profile
defined on the Wellbore
> Geothermal Gradient
dialog box.

Unlike temperature data in the Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient


dialog box, the user-entered temperature data on this tab can be
referenced to MD or TVD.
Note
If you are copying temperature data from another source, be sure to verify whether
the data is based on MD or TVD. Before you copy the data into this tab, be sure you
have selected the correct option for MD or TVD.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-21

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

View Burst Load Pressure Plots


Burst load pressure plots can be graphically viewed by selecting several
burst plots available from the View > Burst Plots submenu.

The View > Burst Plots > Pressure Profiles and View > Burst Plots >
Differential Pressures plots characterize the internal and external
pressure profiles as a function of either MD or TVD for all selected burst
and custom burst load cases.

6-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Burst Design Load Line


Burst load data can be graphically viewed by selecting several burst
plots available from the View > Burst Plots menu.

The corrections conventionally applied to the nominal pipe ratings when


performing a manual calculation will be applied to the Actual Load Line
to create the Design Load Line.
The Burst Design Load Line is corrected for temperature if the
Temperature Deration check box is selected on the Tubular > Design
Parameters > Analysis Options tab.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-23

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Specifying Collapse Loads


Selecting Collapse Loads
Use the Select tab to enable and disable applicable collapse load cases,
and to select external pressure profiles.

Select the Tubular > Collapse Loads >


Edit tab to change the default parameters
for each load case selected.

String name.

Drilling
loads can be
selected if the
casing shoe
is shallower
than the well
TD.

Production
loads can be
selected if the
casing name is
production.
Five methods of
calculating
external
pressure profiles
are included for
collapse design.

When the Single External Pressure Profile check box is selected


on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab, the
selected external pressure is used for all collapse load cases.

Most drilling collapse-load cases can only be selected for strings in


which the setting depth (shoe depth in Wellbore > Casing and Tubing
Scheme spreadsheet) is less than the well TD, as defined in the
Wellbore > General dialog box.
All the collapse loads are discussed in detail in the online help system.
Most production collapse load cases can only be selected for production
strings (those strings in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme

6-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

spreadsheet for which the Name cell contents are Production).


Exceptions to this rule are:

Cementing drilling collapse load case can be selected for all strings.

Gas migration production collapse load case is unavailable


for liners.
Note
The Cementing drilling collapse load case and the Gas Migration production
collapse load case have self-described external pressure profiles, and are unaffected
by the Single External Pressure Profile option and external pressure profile
selections. The external pressure profile for collapse Custom load cases is entirely
user-defined, and is similarly unaffected.

The Internal Profiles list box contains the names of the selected load
cases. As load cases are enabled and disabled, this list box updates
automatically, and the currently selected load case is highlighted.

Selecting Different External Pressure Profiles for Each Load Case


If the Single External Pressure Profile check box is not selected on the
Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab, external
pressure profiles can be independently selected for each load case.
Highlight a load case in the Internal Profile list box, and select the
corresponding external pressure profile from the External Profile box.
If the Single External Pressure Profile check box is selected, only one
external pressure profile can be selected for use with all of the selected
load cases.

Defining Collapse Load Details


Select the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Edit tab to specify or view
parameters for each load case and external pressure profile enabled on
the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select and Tubular > Collapse
Loads > Custom tabs. The tab parameters are used in constructing a
specific load case or external pressure profile. The parameters available

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-25

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

vary depending on the current selection. Some parameter values are


editable, while others are listed for information purposes only.

Edit the default parameters


for the Fluid Gradients w/
Pore Pressure load case.
Set the Fluid Gradient
Above and Below TOC to
the same mud weight to
model a poor cement job
with a continuous column of
mud behind the casing.

Viewing Collapse Load Pressure Plots


Collapse load data can be graphically viewed by selecting several
collapse plots available from the View > Collapse Plots menu.

In this case, the Lost Returns w/ Mud Drop load case


represents the design basis for collapse.
In the case of production loads, analysis of the Above/
Below Packer load case is beneficial to determine the
highest collapse pressure.

6-26

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Collapse Design Load Line


The View > Collapse Plots > Load Line plot characterizes the actual
and design load lines as a function of either MD or TVD for all selected
collapse and custom collapse load cases.

The collapse load line is corrected for temperature,


tension, and internal pressure. The correction for tension
constantly updates the load line when different weights of
casing are selected.

The design load line on this plot is the same as (and always consistent
with) the design load line on the collapse View > Design Plots >
Collapse plot. This plot is used for interactive graphical design and
visual comparison of current-string API collapse rating with design
collapse loads.
The design load line for collapse represents the maximum design
collapse pressure as a function of depth based on consideration of all

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-27

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

selected collapse and custom collapse load cases for the current string,
and after the following adjustments:

Correcting the applied collapse pressure to an effective collapse


pressure based on the effect of internal pressure on collapse
resistance

Applying to each load case the appropriate collapse design factor


from the Tubular > Design Parameters dialog box (the default) or
from a load-case specific alternate design factor specification on the
Tubular > Collapse Loads > Options tab

Adjusting the design load line to compensate for the effect of


elevated temperature on minimum yield strength (and, hence,
collapse rating) when the Temperature Deration check box is
selected on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options
tab for the current string

Considering the effect of tensile axial loading on collapse resistance

The actual load line for collapse represents the maximum actual
differential pressure (effective collapse pressure due to effect of internal
pressure on collapse resistance) as a function of depth based on the load
case or cases that dominate in construction of the design load line.

6-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Specifying Axial Loads Details


Select the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab to enable or disable axial
loads against which the current string is evaluated. To enable the load
case, select the corresponding check boxes. After they are enabled, the
load case variables, such as overpull force or casing running speed, can
be edited.

Select axial load cases on


the Select tab.

Running and cementing loads that can be considered include:

Running loads that consider shock loads due to instantaneous


deceleration from a running speed

A required incremental overpull force when running casing

A pressure test performed when bumping the plug while the cement
is in its fluid state, creating a large piston force

In addition, you can include in the axial design all the axial load profiles
resulting from the burst and collapse load cases by selecting the Service
Loads check box on the Tubular > Axial Load > Select tab.
All of the axial loads are discussed in detail in the online help.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-29

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

Defining Custom Loads


In addition to the selection of load cases that automatically create
internal and external pressure, the StressCheck software allows you to
customize a load scenario and apply it as a burst or collapse criterion in
the design process together with the automated loads.

Displaying the List of Existing Custom Loads


Use Tubular > Custom Loads dialog box to access the list of defined
custom loads contained in the current library, define new custom loads,
and display and manage your custom loads spreadsheets.

List of existing
custom load cases.

Click the buttons


on the right side of
the dialog box to
create, delete, or
rename custom
load cases.

Important!
This dialog box has no Cancel button, so any changes made through this dialog box
cannot be undone. Pressing Esc instead of clicking Close writes all your changes to
the catalog, but the currently selected custom load is not activated.

The Custom Loads dialog box manages a library of custom loads


spreadsheets that are saved with the current Design. Each spreadsheet
contains a custom load profile consisting of external pressures and
internal pressures at given depths.
Temperature data for custom loads are recorded as a user-entered
temperature profile for the selected custom load on the tab in the
Tubular > Bust Loads > Temperature or Tubular > Collapse
Loads > Temperature tabs, as appropriate to the nature of the custom

6-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

load. The default temperature profile is geothermal on the Temperature


tab when a custom load is selected as the current load.

Renaming a Custom Load


Click Rename in the Tubular > Custom Loads dialog box to change
the name of the currently selected custom load.
Rename the custom load
RTTS.

Click Close to
close the dialog box
and begin editing
load data.

Editing Custom Load Data


Define the Pressure Profile
Select the Tubular > Custom Loads spreadsheet to define custom load
internal and external pressure profiles as a function of measured depth.
Create a custom load when none of the internal and external pressure
profiles automatically generated (for example, the Gas Migration

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-31

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

internal profile and the Mud and Cement Mix-Water external profile)
satisfy design requirements.

Custom load profiles can be selected as burst, collapse, and axial service
loads from the Tubular > Burst Loads > Custom and Tubular >
Collapse Loads > Custom tabs, respectively. Custom loads are only
considered as axial service loads when the Service Loads check box is
selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab. They are also taken
into account in triaxial and minimum cost design.

Loads are defined on a per string basis; therefore, different loads can be
defined for each string in the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme
spreadsheet. To change strings, use the Tubular > Current String
command or the Select String pull-down list on the Wizard toolbar.
Specify and edit numerous custom loads by using the Select Custom
Load pull-down list and custom load buttons on the Template toolbar.
Depth values on this spreadsheet are always expressed as MD. When
data are entered for a deviated well, and hydrostatic pressures are
calculated for use in a custom load case, recall that the pressures must
be calculated for the TVD corresponding to the MD of interest for the

6-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

line entry. The relationship between MD and TVD for the current well
can be reviewed by using the Deviation Profile table.
Even though depths are entered on a MD-basis, the pressure data are
interpolated and extrapolated on a TVD-basis (a reasonable convention,
because almost all pressure loads applied to casing strings are
hydrostatic in nature). If an extrapolated pressure value is less than zero,
it is assigned the value zero.

Including the Custom Load in the Analysis


Select the Tubular > Burst Loads > Custom tab to specify the custom
load pressure profile(s) you want to use as a burst load case for the
active string.

Select the box to include


this pressure profile as a
burst load case.

Defining the Custom Load Temperature Profile


Use the Tubular > Burst Loads > Temperature tab to specify the
temperature profile you want to use for the load case selected in the pulldown list at the top of this tab. You can only select load cases enabled
on the Select and Custom tab in the Burst Loads dialog box. Select the
Default option to use the temperature profile as explained in Burst Load
Case Methodologies. Select the User-entered option to define an
alternate temperature profile. Select the Geothermal option to use the

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-33

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

temperature profile defined in the Geothermal Gradient dialog box.


You can only edit temperature data if you select User-entered.

Select the
desired custom
load case.

Select the temperature


profile you want to use.

The temperature profile for a particular load case can also be viewed as
a plot using Burst Plots > Temperature Profiles.
Unlike temperature data in the Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient
dialog box, the temperature data on this tab can be referenced to MD or
TVD.

Shut-in Load Cases


Select the Shut-in check box as the load case on the Tubular > Burst
Loads > Select tab. Proceed to the Edit tab and select Shut-In from the
list. Select the Hot check box, if you want the bottom hole temperature
to be continuously applied to the surface. Deselect the Hot check box if

6-34

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

the surface temperature needs to be continuously applied to the base of


the tubing.

Note
If you are copying temperature data from another source, be sure to verify whether
the data is based on MD or TVD. Before you copy the data into this tab, be sure you
have selected the correct option for MD or TVD.

Viewing the Pressure Profiles Including the Custom Load


You can view the burst load plots including the custom load just as you
did for the predefined burst loads.

Plots include the custom load (RTTS) profile.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

6-35

Chapter 6: Tubular Load Data

6-36

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7

Graphical Design
You can use the StressCheck software in three ways during your casing design process. This
section of the course discusses each of these options in the following order.

Use the StressCheck software to perform an automated design


using either a full API casing list or a user-defined inventory.

Use the StressCheck software to verify an existing string weight


and grade.

Use the minimum cost tool for an automated optimization for


uniaxial, biaxial, and triaxial casing design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-1

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Performing an Automated Design


Checking Burst Design Using the Burst Design Plot
Select the View > Design Plots > Burst plot to perform graphical
burst-load casing design, or to check the burst design of a string
specified on the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. Depth is on the
vertical axis and burst pressure (effective burst load) is on the
horizontal axis.
Initially, the design load line is
constructed from the maximum burst
loads based on selected load cases.

7-2

The Pipe Rating curve is not displayed on


the plot because a pipe section has not
yet been created.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Creating a Pipe Section


A string section that meets all pipe-body burst design criteria has a pipe
rating line that is at all points (over the string section length) to the right
of the design load line.

Click the pipe


section.
(Notice the
cursor
has changed.)

Read pipe description here.

1. To specify a casing string to begin your Design, double-click


anywhere on the design view. A rating line corresponding to the
highest rated pipe in the inventory for the current OD is displayed.
2. To quickly view a description of the pipe that the StressCheck
software selected, click the rating line. The pipe description is
displayed on the left corner of the status bar.
Since a pipe section has been created, two lines are shown. One line is

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-3

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

the burst design load line, and the other line is the burst pipe rating line.
Note
The Burst Design plot does not reflect the implications for burst design integrity of
connection selections for string sections in the current string. After a pipe-body
design is performed, the effect of connection selections on design integrity can be
assessed directly in the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet.

What is the Burst Design Load Line?


The burst design load line reflects the maximum burst differential
pressure experienced by the casing as a function of depth. It is based on
the load cases selected on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Select tab. This
pressure was multiplied by the burst design factor specified for the
current string on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Design Factors
tab, or the burst load case-specific alternate design factors specified on
the Tubular > Burst Loads > Options tab. When different (that is,
alternate) burst design factors are used for different selected burst load
cases, the design factor reflected in the design load line may vary with
depth as a function of the burst load case having local control over
burst design.

Effects of Temperature Deration


When the Temperature Deration check box is selected for the current
string on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab,
the local minimum yield strength (MYS) of the casing in each string
section and the local burst rating are derated as a function of local
temperature. This effect is considered in the burst design plot by
increasing the local design load line values by the local ratio of original
to temperature-derated MYS, and not by decreasing the burst rating line.
The default (worst-case) or user-entered temperature profiles specified
on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Temperature tab are used to
determine MYS temperature deration for each load case selected on the
Tubular > Burst Loads > Select and Tubular > Burst Loads >
Custom tabs.

What is the Pipe Rating Line?


The constant burst ratings displayed in this curve correspond to the burst
rating values specified in the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet for
the one or more pipes listed in the current strings Tubular > String
Sections spreadsheet. Showing the effect of MYS temperature deration
on the design load line allows the burst rating lines to remain constant

7-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

(vertical), and they can be more easily manipulated with a mouse. A


string section that meets all pipe-body burst design criteria has a pipe
rating line that is at all points (over the string section length) to the right
of the design load line.
Note
The pipe rating line does not appear until you have created a pipe section.
Double-click anywhere on the design plot to create a pipe section.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-5

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Modifying a Pipe Section


The current strings weight and grade can be changed by manipulating
(dragging) the pipe rating line. Each vertical section of the pipe rating
line represents a different string section. String sections can be created,
deleted, or modified by clicking, pointing, and dragging the rating line.
Changes made to the current-string design by manipulating the line(s)
are reflected on the View > Design Plots > Collapse, View > Design
Plots > Axial, and View > Design Plots > Triaxial design plots as well
as in the current strings Tubular > String Sections and Tubular >
Connections spreadsheets, and vice versa.

Click the pipe you


want to change, and
drag to the left,
towards the load line.

1. To modify the casing design to economically meet the design


criteria, place the mouse pointer over the rating line. The pointer
changes shape and becomes two vertical bars with arrows pointing
left and right.

7-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

2. Click and drag the rating line toward the load line.
3. Release the button when the rating line begins to intersect the load
line (that is, the safety factor equals the design factor at the
intersection point).
4. The StressCheck software adjusts the location of the rating line to
correspond with the pipe in the current inventory that has the
closest greater burst rating.
The basic premise of graphical design is that pipe with a lower rating is
probably more economical. Designs with a rating line close to the load
line are usually more economical.

The pipe
selection was
changed and
the burst criteria
is still met.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-7

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Comparing Burst and Collapse Design Checks


A side-by-side comparison of Burst and Collapse loads provides a way
to quickly determine if the pipe rating line adjustment satisfies collapse
criteria for the selected string.

The collapse criteria


are not met in the lower
portion of the string.

Checking Collapse Design Using the Collapse Design Plot


Use View > Design Plots > Collapse plot to perform graphical
collapse-load casing design or to check the collapse design of a string
specified on the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. Depth is on the
vertical axis, and collapse pressure (effective collapse load) is on the
horizontal axis.
Two lines are shown: the collapse design load line and the collapse pipe
rating line. When the design load line remains to the left of the pipe
rating line, the design for collapse is taken to be acceptable based on the
current strings collapse design criteria.

7-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

What is the Collapse Design Load Line?


The design load line for collapse represents the maximum design
collapse pressure as a function of depth based on consideration of all
selected collapse and custom collapse load cases for the current string.
The design load line also includes:

Correcting the applied collapse pressure to an effective collapse


pressure based on the effect of internal pressure on
collapse resistance.

Applying the appropriate collapse design factor to each load case,


either from the Tubular > Design Parameters > Design Factors
tab (the default) or from a load casespecific alternate design factor
specification on the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Options tab

Adjusting the design load line to compensate for the effect of


elevated temperature on minimum yield strength (and, hence,
collapse rating) when the Temperature Deration check box is
selected on the current strings Tubular > Design Parameters >
Analysis Options tab.

Considering the effect of tensile axial loading on


collapse resistance.

What is the Pipe Rating Line?


The constant collapse ratings shown in this plot correspond to the
collapse rating values specified in the Tubular > Pipe Inventory
spreadsheet for the one or more pipes listed in the current strings
Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. Showing the effect of axial
tension loads and MYS temperature deration on the design load line
allows the collapse rating lines to remain constant (that is, vertical), and
more easily manipulated with a mouse. A string section that meets all
pipe-body collapse design criteria has a pipe rating line that is at all
points (over the string section length) to the right of the design load line.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-9

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

To summarize, the effects on collapse resistance of both tension and


MYS temperature deration are considered in this plot by calculating a
reduced collapse rating for each string section, as a function of depth and
local tension and temperature. API Bulletin 5C3 collapse formulation is
used with derated yield strength due to tension and temperature (when
the Temperature Deration check box is selected on the Tubular >
Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab for the current string). The
load line (API Bulletin 5C3 effective collapse pressure) is adjusted to
reflect the appropriate design factor (possibly as a function of depth,
when using alternate design factors), and then multiplied by the ratio of
the nominal API collapse rating to the reduced collapse rating as a
function of depth. Reduction in collapse rating for tension and MYS
temperature deration is shown by increasing the load line and not by
decreasing the rating line.
The current strings weight and grade can be changed by manipulating
(dragging) the pipe rating line. Each vertical section of the pipe rating
line represents a different string section. String sections can be created,
deleted, or modified by clicking, pointing, and dragging the rating line.
Changes made to the current-string design by manipulating the pipe
rating line(s) are reflected on the View > Design Plots > Collapse,
View > Design Plots > Axial, and View > Design Plots > Triaxial
design plots as well as in the current strings Tubular > String Sections
and Tubular > Connections spreadsheets, and vice versa.

7-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Adding a Section to Satisfy Design Criteria


A new section can be added graphically from the Collapse Design plot.

Notice the new


section. Sections are
marked with an X at
each end.

1. To create an additional pipe section that will meet design criteria,


position the mouse pointer near the depth you want to create a new
section (but not directly on the pipe rating line).
2. Double-click to create a new section at the pointer depth. An X
marker denotes the section change.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-11

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

3. Move the rating line until you satisfy the design criteria as
described on Modifying a Pipe Section on page 7-6.

Notice the two pipe sections. The


change is applied to the burst design
plot also.

Checking Axial and Service Load Profiles


The following example shows a comparison of the Axial Load Profiles
and the Service Load Profiles, with consideration for bending. The axial
load profile displays an overall view of the axial load profile as a
function of either MD or TVD, while the Service Load Profiles plots
characterize the axial load with bending-induced pseudo-loads for all
burst and collapse load cases (including custom load cases) selected for
the current string.

7-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

The View > Axial Plots > Load Profiles >


Apparent w/Bending plot shows the axial
load profile for each axial load case
selected for the current string. The
aggregate Service Loads Profile is
included if the Service Loads check box is
selected on the Tubular > Axial Loads >
Select tab.

The View > Axial Plots > Service Load


Profiles > Apparent w/Bending plot
illustrates how this Service Loads Profile is
constructed. It is formed from the absolute
maximum values of axial load produced by
the pressure effects of the burst and
collapse load cases selected for the
current string.

Using the Axial Load Profiles Plot


The View > Axial Plots > Load Profiles plot characterizes the axial
load profile as plots that display the following axial load profile plots as
a function of either MD or TVD, depending on the final selection from
the View > Axial Plots > Load Profiles submenu:

Apparent (with bending-induced pseudo-loads included)

Actual (without bending-induced pseudo-loads)

All apparent and actual axial load cases are displayed for the
current string, including the aggregate service load profile (if
Service Loads is a selected axial load case), burst load cases, and
collapse load cases

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-13

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

The aggregate service load profile is shown when service loads is a


selected axial load case for the current string. The aggregate service load
profile includes the effect of:

Thermal strain due to temperature change

Ballooning due to differences between internal and external


pressure profiles

Piston forces at end areas and cross-section changes

Pick-up and slack-off loads specified on the Tubular > Initial


Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab

Buckling (if the Buckling check box is selected on the Tubular >
Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab)

Top of cement (TOC)

Each effect may apply to the individual burst or collapse case specific
service load profiles and yield the maximum service load line when
adjusted with design factors for temperature deration and taken in
the aggregate.

Using the Axial Service Load Profiles Plots


The View > Axial Plots > Service Load Profiles plots characterize the
axial load with bending-induced pseudo-loads and without
bending-induced pseudo-loads for all burst and collapse load cases
(including custom load cases) selected for the current string. The actual
load profile displayed depends on the final selection from the View >
Axial Plots > Service Load Profiles submenu.
The apparent and actual axial load cases include the effects of:

7-14

Thermal strain due to temperature change

Ballooning due to differences between internal and external


pressure profiles

Piston forces at end areas and cross-section changes

Pick-up and slack-off loads specified on the Tubular > Initial


Conditions > Cementing and Landing tab

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Buckling (if the Buckling check box is selected on the Tubular >
Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab)

Top of cement (TOC)

Each effect may apply to the individual burst or collapse service load
case. This plot explicitly traces the concatenation of service load profile
segments used to construct this composite profile plot.

Using the Service Load Lines Plot


This plot displays when the Service Loads check box is selected as an
axial load case for the current string on the Tubular > Axial Loads >
Select tab. It represents all service load profiles from the View > Axial
Plots > Service Load Profiles plot after adjustment with the respective
design factors and the effect of elevated temperature on minimum yield
strength (temperature deration).
Plot data is derived from either the Tubular > Design Parameters >
Design Factors tab, or from the alternate design factors specified for
each respective load case on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Options or
Tubular > Collapse Loads > Options tabs. This plot is provided to
facilitate user insight into the process by which this Service Loads
profile plot is determined. This concatenation of service load profile
segments, as a function of depth, corresponds to the service load line
segments that define the composite maximum load line that can be
traced in the View > Axial Plots > Service Load Profiles plot.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-15

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Checking Axial and Triaxial Design


The following example shows a comparison of the Axial and Triaxial
design plots. The Axial plot allows you to perform graphical axial-load
casing design or to check the axial design of a string. The Triaxial plot
allows you to perform graphical casing design based on triaxial stress
analysis or to check the triaxial design of a string.

Burst and collapse considerations control most


Designs. If an adjustment is necessary based
on axial or triaxial design, it can be made from
the Axial Design plot.

For this string selection,


both axial and triaxial
design meet the criteria.

Using the Axial Design Plot


Select the View > Design Plots > Axial plot to perform graphical
axial-load casing design or to check the axial design of a string specified
on the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet. Depth is on the vertical
axis and axial force (effective axial load) is on the horizontal axis.
The axial design load line and the axial pipe rating line are displayed on
this plot. When the design load line remains to the left of the pipe rating
line, the design for tension and compression is taken to be acceptable
based on the current strings axial design criteria.

7-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

What is the Axial Design Load Line?


The axial design load line reflects the maximum apparent axial load
experienced by the casing as a function of depth, based on the load cases
selected in the Tubular > Axial Loads dialog box. The line is adjusted
by adding an axial pseudo-load to reflect bending-induced increases in
axial stress. When different (alternate) axial design factors are used for
different selected axial-load and axial service-load cases, the design
factor reflected in the design load line may vary with depth as a function
of the axial load case or service-load case having local control over
axial design.

Effects of Temperature Deration


When the Temperature Deration check box is selected for the current
string on the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab,
the local minimum yield strength (MYS) of the casing in each string
section (and hence, the local axial rating) is derated as a function of local
temperature. This effect is considered in the axial design plot by
increasing the local design load line values by the local ratio of original
to temperature-derated MYS, and not by decreasing the axial rating line.
Default temperature profiles for the axial running and installation are
used to determine MYS deration for each load case selected on the
Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab. Default or user-entered
temperature profiles for service loads are determined using the
Tubular > Burst Loads > Select, Tubular > Burst Loads > Custom,
Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select, or Tubular > Collapse Loads >
Custom tabs. For service loads, the temperature profile for each
selected burst or collapse load (including custom loads) can be specified
and reviewed on the Tubular > Burst Loads > Temperature or
Tubular > Collapse Loads > Temperature tab, and can be viewed on
the burst and collapse temperature profile plots.
In the StressCheck software, the local tension loading for service loads
is based on the actual axial load distribution for all selected burst and
collapse service load cases (including custom loads). It includes the
effect of temperature change, ballooning due to burst pressure or reverse
ballooning due to collapse pressure, piston forces due to end areas, area
changes, plugs, wellbore deviation, and pickup or slackoff loads
specified on the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and
Landing tab. TOC depth is specified in the Wellbore > Casing and
Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-17

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

What is the Axial Pipe Rating Line?


The constant axial ratings shown in this plot correspond to the axial
rating values specified in the Tubular > Pipe Inventory spreadsheet for
one or more pipes listed in the current strings Tubular > String
Sections spreadsheet. Showing the effect of MYS temperature deration
on the design load line allows the axial rating lines to remain constant
(vertical), and they can be more easily manipulated with a mouse. A
string section that meets all pipe-body axial design criteria has a pipe
rating line that is at all points (over the string section length) to the right
of the design load line. Reduction in axial rating for MYS temperature
deration is shown by increasing the load line and not by decreasing the
rating line.
The current strings weight and grade can be changed by manipulating
(dragging) the pipe rating line. Each vertical section of the pipe rating
line represents a different string section. String sections can be created,
deleted, or modified by clicking, pointing, and dragging the rating line.
Changes made to the current-string design by manipulating the pipe
rating line(s) are reflected on the burst, collapse, and triaxial design plots
as well as in the current strings Tubular > String Sections and
Tubular > Connections spreadsheets, and vice versa.
Note
The Axial Design plot does not reflect the implications for axial design integrity of
connection selections for string-sections in the current string. After a pipe-body
design is performed, the effect of connection selections on design integrity can be
assessed directly in the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet.

Using the Triaxial Design Plot


Select the View > Design Plots > Triaxial command to perform
graphical casing design based on triaxial stress analysis or to check the
triaxial design of a string specified on the String Sections spreadsheet.
Depth is on the vertical axis and von Mises equivalent (VME) stress is
on the horizontal axis.

7-18

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Because the
design load
line is to the
left of the pipe
rating line, the
design for
triaxial
loading is
acceptable.

Two lines are shown: the triaxial design load line and the triaxial pipe
rating line (that is, the minimum yield strength for each string section).
When the design load line remains to the left of the pipe rating line, the
design for triaxial loading is taken to be acceptable based on the triaxialdesign-criteria for the current string.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-19

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

The triaxial design load line reflects the maximum state of combined
loading experienced by the casing as a function of depth, based on the
current-string load cases selected in the Burst Loads, Collapse Loads,
and Axial Loads dialog boxes. All effects considered in the formulation
of their respective unfactored load linestemperature deration, as with
the burst, collapse, and axial design plotsis considered as an
adjustment to the factored triaxial load line. The triaxial design factor is
specified in the Design Parameters dialog box. When different (that is,
alternate) triaxial design factors are specified for selected burst,
collapse, axial, and axial service-load cases in the Options tab of the
Load Case dialog box, the design factor reflected in the triaxial design
load line may vary with depth as a function of the load case having local
control over triaxial design.
Triaxial analysis does not specifically address design considerations
such as buckling and collapse, both of which must be addressed
separately. When the Buckling check box is selected in the Design
Parameters dialog box for the current string, buckling data is included
in the results available in the Triaxial Results. The available data
includes the overall buckled length (inclusive of both sinusoidal and
helical buckling modes), the overpull required to eliminate buckling,
and the buckling-induced bending stress (included with the bending
stress inferred on the basis of local wellbore curvature). Except for
thick-walled pipe, API collapse behavior is an elastic or inelastic
instability problem rather than one of precollapse yield. Triaxial
analysis should not be used in tracing the collapse integrity of
casing strings.
The constant ratings shown in this plot correspond to the minimum yield
strength values specified in the Pipe Inventory spreadsheet for the one
or more pipes listed in the String Sections spreadsheet for the current
string. Showing the effect of MYS temperature deration on the design
load line allows the triaxial rating lines to remain constant (that is,
vertical), and they can be more easily manipulated with a mouse. A
string section that meets all pipe-body triaxial design criteria has a pipe
rating line that is at all points (over the string section length) to the right
of the design load line. Again, reduction in effective yield strength for
MYS temperature deration is shown by increasing the load line, and not
by decreasing the rating line.

7-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

In this plot, and in contrast to the convention employed in the burst,


collapse, and axial design plots, the current strings weight and grade
can be changed by manipulating (dragging) both the design load and
pipe rating lines, respectively. Manipulating the design load line pages
through available inventory as a function of weight (for constant grade),
while manipulation of the pipe rating line pages through available
inventory as a function of grade (for constant weight).
Each vertical section of the pipe rating line represents a different string
section. String sections can be created, deleted, or modified by clicking,
pointing, and dragging the rating line. Changes made to the
current-strings design by manipulating the load line and/or the pipe
rating line(s) are reflected on the Burst, Collapse, and Axial design plots
as well as in the current-strings String Sections and Connections
spreadsheets, and vice versa.
Note
This plot does not reflect the implications for design integrity of connection
selections for string section in the current string. After a pipe-body design is
performed, the effect of connection selections on design integrity can be assessed
directly in the Connections spreadsheet.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-21

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Using the Triaxial Design Limit Plot


The View > Triaxial Check > Design Limits plot is a representation of
the VME stress with API ratings. The plot shows one string section at
a time.
In this example, the plot displays data for the
active string section.

All load cases for the upper string are within the uniaxial design criteria
and also the triaxial design envelope.
Note
Temperature deration is not considered in the Triaxial Design Limit plot.

To view data for another string section, select the string from
the Wizard.

7-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Modify a Design
The Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet allows you to manually
modify an existing design or enter a design you would like to check
using the StressCheck software. A cost summary is displayed on
this spreadsheet.

This string has two sections.

Cost summary.

The current depths, ODs, weights, and grades can be changed from this
spreadsheet. Any changes made here are reflected in the design plots
and vice versa.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-23

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Checking a Specific Casing Design


You can also analyze a specific string rather than allowing the
StressCheck software to suggest a string. First, you must delete any
strings that may already exist. Then, you must enter the string you want
to analyze.
Because the string is defined as a 9 5/8 Protective Casing,
you must first define the string size as 9 5/8.

1. Access the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet.


2. Delete any existing rows.
3. Enter the weight, grade, and depth of string section. Double-click
on a cell to access the available pipe sections. Enter one line for
each pipe section.
To create a Tapered String, enter another section, and then enter the
depth at which the second section starts. Specify the weight and grade
of the new string.

7-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Compressional Load Check


Select the Tubular > Compression Load Check dialog box to compute
the compressive loads at the wellhead for the conductor and
surface casing.

This calculation is only a check. It is not used by the StressCheck


software to calculate minimum cost designs. The compressive forces
and absolute safety factors are displayed as results.
Conductor and surface string section data must be entered. If the
conductor and surface string data is not present, the following dialog
box appears:

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-25

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

You can view the results by selecting View > Tabular Results >
Compression Load Check.
Note
The compression load check results reflect values for a vertical well even if the well
being analyzed is a deviated well. Therefore, the results are always the
maximum values.

7-26

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Minimum Cost Design


Use the Tubular > Minimum Cost > Parameters tab to specify basic
minimum-cost solution constraints.

The Cost of K-55 Steel is used in


conjunction with cost factors in the
Tubular > Pipe Inventory to rank
the cost of steel during the
automated design. Modifying this
value updates all the plain end
costs of pipe in the
current inventory.

Fields and Controls


Maximum Number of Sections
In the Maximum Number of Sections field, enter the maximum number
of string sections that have different weight and grade that can be
tolerated in the minimum-cost casing design.

Minimum Section Length


In the Minimum Section Length field, enter the minimum tolerable
length to be considered for a particular string section in the
minimum-cost casing design solution.

Cost of K-55 Steel


In the Cost of K-55 Steel field, specify the baseline reference cost, per
unit mass, for API grade K-55 plain-end casing. This value, in

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-27

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

combination with the grade-specific default factors entered in the Tools


> Default > Cost Factors dialog box, is used to cost all casing in the
minimum-cost casing design solution.
Note
The StressCheck defaults for the cost of K-55 steel and the related grade-specific
cost factors are based on information available at the time of release and may not
accurately reflect grade-related differences in the cost of plain-end casing. The costs
for oil-country tubular goods (OCTGs) are determined, in general, within the
context of a commodity- and inventory-driven marketplace. The baseline cost for
plain-end K-55 casing, as well as the default cost factors found in the Tools >
Defaults > Cost Factor dialog box, should be validated against your understanding
of prevailing casing costs within your organization.

Select the Tubular > Minimum Cost > Design tab to select regions of
the API design envelope and triaxial design ellipse within which
minimum-cost design solutions must reside.
Click an area to include it or
remove it from the analysis.
All gray areas will be included
in the minimum cost design.
In this example, the minimum
cost design will be governed
by these criteria and not take
advantage of the increased
burst capability with
increased tension or fall into
undesirable triaxial areas,
such as the bottom left
quadrant.

The API design envelope is bounded by the burst limit state at the top;
the compression and tension limit states to left and right, respectively;
and the collapse limit state at the bottom. The triaxial design ellipse is
bounded by the projected Von Mises failure surface for the minimum
yield limit state.

7-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Gray-shaded areas within either the API design envelope or the triaxial
design ellipse indicate portions of either or both design regions that you
selected as legitimate domains for evolution of minimum cost designs.
The gray zone (design domain) can be made larger or smaller by
clicking various parts of the plot. Click a gray area changes the area to
white, which excludes that area from the design domain.
Note
The design domain is of a generalized form; that is, no burst, collapse, axial, or
triaxial design factors are explicitly stated. Design factors used in association with
minimum-cost design within the selected design domain are specified in the Design
Parameters dialog box, or on the Options tab for each selected load case in the
Burst Loads, Collapse Loads, or Axial Loads dialog boxes.

Minimum Cost Search


Select View > Design Plots > Minimum Cost to open the Minimum
Cost Search dialog box. This dialog box automatically finds a
minimum-cost design solution for the current string using available
inventory, grade-dependent costs per unit mass, all boundary
conditions, load-case constructs, design criteria and constraints, and
minimum-cost search parameters specified by the user.

Status of the
cost search
is displayed.

You can monitor the progress of the minimum-cost search, and cancel
or end the search at any time.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-29

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Select API and Premium Connections


Select the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet to select regular 8 round
(STC or LTC) or buttress (BTC) couplings if they are available for the
current OD and weight. If a premium connection has been specified on
the Tubular > Special Connections Inventory spreadsheet for the
current OD, weight, and grade, it can also be selected from the pulldown list.
The asterisk (*) indicates the
connection does not meet
design criteria.

Select connection from


pull-down list.

When a connection is selected, the corresponding safety factors are


displayed so you may evaluate its suitability. A default price of the pipe
and connection that determines the total cost of a section is shown. The
default price can be changed to reflect the actual cost to your
purchasing department.
Select the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet to specify, view, and
evaluate connections for each string section in the current string. These
connections are based on preliminary design information specified on
the Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme spreadsheet.

7-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

The Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet is first used to fully define
the geometry, unit weight, and strength characteristics for the current
string. The Tubular > Connections spreadsheet is the companion that
is subsequently used to specify corresponding API or proprietary
(premium) connection type, associated properties, and to assess the
suitability of the selections face-to-face connection design criteria for
burst and axial loads.
Connection selection and evaluation should only be performed after a
satisfactory pipe body design is established. For this reason, entries in
the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet cannot be made until at least
one string section for the current string is defined in the Tubular >
String Sections spreadsheet.
After a connection is specified for a string section, connection safety
factors based on the current design criteria display so that the connection
performance can be immediately evaluated.
On the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet, a default value for
unit-length cost of the current string section, with connections, is
displayed in the Pipe + Conn cell. This value can be modified to match
actual costs. Based on the values for Pipe + Conn, the cost for each
string section is displayed in the Cost column. The total cost of the
current string is displayed directly under the column heading in the Cost
column header.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

7-31

Chapter 7: Graphical Design

Define Premium Connections


Premium connections need to be defined in the Tubular > Special
Connections spreadsheet and then selected for that particular string
section in the Tubular > Connections spreadsheet.
Select the desired connection from the
pull-down list.

The line defining the premium connection cannot


be edited after the connection is selected for use.
Note
Minimum Cost or Triaxial Design does not take into account any connections. The
suitability of API and premium connections must be confirmed and checked
separately here.

7-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 8

Analyzing Tabular Results and


Reports
In the previous chapter, you learned which design plots are available in the StressCheck
software and how results are displayed graphically. The StressCheck software also displays
results in tables and reports, which are discussed in this section of the course.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-1

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Input Data Tables


The View > Input Data Tables submenu contains commands for
displaying tables summarizing the data found on all dialog boxes on the
Wellbore and Tubular menus, and permits the export to other
documents, as OLE objects, of dialog box-specific user-entered data.

Input Data Tables submenu

8-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Tabular Results
The View > Tabular Results submenu items summarize, in tabular
form, the data found on all dialog boxes on the Wellbore and Tubular
menus. When you select an item from this submenu, the contents of the
active window pane are replaced by a table that presents the information
described by the submenu item title.

Tabular
Results
submenu

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-3

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

The View > Tabular Results submenu items summarize, in tabular


form, the data found on all dialog boxes on the Wellbore and Tubular
menus. You can export the data entered in a dialog box as an OLE object
and include it in a custom report. When you select an item from this
submenu, the contents of the active window pane are replaced by a table
that presents the information described by the submenu item title.
View > Tabular Results > String Summary summarizes the string
sections and burst, collapse, axial, and triaxial design safety factors.

Viewing the String Summary


The View > Tubular Results > String Summary table displays a
summary of the configuration, design factors, and cost summary for the
string currently selected and constituent string sections.

This summary is a subset of the View > Tabular Results > Well
Summary table. It includes the name of the current string plus the OD,
weight, grade, connection type, depth interval, drift diameter, minimum
burst, and collapse, axial, and triaxial safety factors. It also includes the
cost for each string section, and the total cost for the string.
When N/A displays in place of numerical entries in the burst, collapse,
axial, or triaxial safety factor summaries, it indicates that no applicable
loads were selected. For example, if no axial loads were selected on the
Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab, the cells in the column for axial
safety factors display N/A.
Safety factors greater than 100 are not reported. Instead, +100 is
displayed. Safety factors can be displayed as either absolute (rating
divided by applied load) or normalized (absolute divided by the
appropriate design factor).
Safety factor conventions can be toggled by using the Normalized/
Absolute Safety Factors icon
on the Engineering toolbar, or by

8-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

specifying either one as a preferred safety factor by using the Tools >
Options dialog box.

An asterisk displayed before a safety factor indicates that the safety


factor does not meet a user-defined design factor criterion for a load of
that type (for example, burst). If connections are considered in the
design, a letter code may appear after a safety factor, which indicates
that the design is connection-limited at that depth.
Connection ratings for API casing couplings are calculated by using the
formulations in API Bulletin 5C3. Ratings for proprietary premium
connections are specified on the Tubular > Special Connections
spreadsheet. Many premium connections commonly used are included
in the Special Connections library, and can be exported directly to the
Tubular > Special Connections spreadsheet.

What is the Maximum Allowable Wear?


The View > Tabular Results > Max Allowable Wear table displays
the maximum allowable wear for which the absolute burst and collapse
safety factors will remain greater than or equal to the appropriate design
factors as a function of depth. Allowable wear is presented both as a
percentage of nominal wall thickness and as a wear depth. Additionally,
the remaining wall thickness is presented. The OD, weight, and grade of

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-5

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

each section defined on the Tubular > String Sections spreadsheet is


also listed at the depth for the section top.

Depth can be displayed as either MD or TVD by toggling the MD/TVD


conversion icon on the Engineering toolbar, or by specifying either one
as a preferred depth by using the Tools > Options dialog box.

8-6

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

The alpha-numeric symbols following the burst and collapse values


indicate the case used to calculate the values for Remaining Wall
Thickness at each depth.
Note
Maximum allowable wear for collapse is based on a determination of the
minimum wall thickness that, when using the standard API Bulletin 5C3 collapse
formulations, preserves the minimum allowable collapse safety factor. No
consideration is given to the particular geometry of the wear and the possible
resulting influence on collapse resistance. Wear is treated as if it were uniformly
distributed around the casing inner circumference. So-called high-collapse
casing grades are evaluated by the same methods used for standard API grades of
the same minimum yield strength. High-collapse performance, where it can be
substantiated, is normally a result of exceptional geometric properties (such as
very low eccentricity, ovality, and wall-thickness variation), and improved
collapse resistance is therefore assumed to be compromised as a consequence
of wear.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-7

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Reporting in the StressCheck Software and


Microsoft Word
There are two main ways of creating a casing design report, including:

Creating and printing a report within the StressCheck software.

Copying and pasting StressCheck input tables and results into a


Microsoft Word report

Generating StressCheck Software Reports


Select the Tools > Reports > Titles tab to add, remove, and define
custom reports. Custom reports can contain as much or as little data as
you want displayed. They can consist of one or several spreadsheets,
tables, plots, or schematics.
These reports can be displayed using the Print Preview command and
printed using the Print command. Reports are customized using the three
tabs shown below.

A list of available
reports is displayed.

8-8

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Click New to create


a new report.

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Select the Tools > Reports > Contents tab to add content to the report.

Click Add to add


items to the report.

The Add Contents dialog box opens. Here, you can select the content
to include in the report.

You can select more


than one item at a time
by holding Ctrl-Shift
down while clicking the
desired items.

Click OK when you


have finished your
selections.

After all content is selected in the Add Contents dialog box, configure
the report as needed by reordering and/or removing items.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-9

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Selected items display in the


Contents tab.

Configure the report


with the Up, Down,
or Remove buttons.

Select the Tools > Reports > Options tab to set options for pagination,
display of string data, and the page orientation.

8-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Previewing and Printing StressCheck Software Reports


Use File > Print Preview to preview an item before printing it. The
selected item is viewed from this utility exactly as it will be printed. You
may view multiple pages simultaneously, move from one page to the
next, and zoom in and out.
Click Print to print
the selected item.

Select the number of pages of


the report that you want
to view.

Select the report you want to


view from the pull-down list.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

8-11

Chapter 8: Analyzing Tabular Results and Reports

Multiple pages of the report can be viewed, and you can click any of the
pages to zoom in and view a single page.
Select 6 Pages to view all six pages of
the report at one time.

To print the currently selected item, click Print on the toolbar (you may
also click Close and then select File > Print).

8-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9

Exercises
The following exercises are designed to reinforce and challenge your knowledge of the
StressCheck software while you participate in this course, and to act as refresher training in
the future.
If there is data mismatch, your instructor will assist you by either troubleshooting or providing
you with the clean data set.
During the course, your instructor will guide you through the exercises and assist with any
questions that may arise.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-1

Chapter 9: Exercises

StressCheck Software Exercise Overview


The exercises in this book are designed to familiarize you with the
StressCheck software. All of the exercises analyze a single Well.

Exercise 1: Reviewing/Creating the Data Hierarchy


In this exercise you will review the data hierarchy created during the
CasingSeat exercise: Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, and
Design. If the data hierarchy has not been created yet, please follow
Exercise 1 in the CasingSeat training manual.

Exercise 2: Preferences and Workspace Configuration


In this exercise, you will set defaults and configure tabs.

Exercise 3: Reviewing/Specifying General Data


This exercise builds on the previous two exercises. Using the data
hierarchy created in Exercise 1, you will specify additional data that
defines the Design you are analyzing. The purpose of this exercise is to
provide you with the opportunity to understand the styles of data input
and the content of the Wellbore menu.

Exercise 4: The Design Process


This exercise helps you understand design load selection and the
design process.

Exercise 5: Minimum Cost


In this exercise, you will use the minimum cost feature to determine if
there is a more economical string selection.

Exercise 6: Analyzing Results


This exercise familiarizes you with the management and presentation of
results on the desktop.

9-2

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 7: Tables and Reports


This exercise familiarizes you with the available results types and
printed reporting. Most of the answers to the questions in the exercise
will be found under the View > Tabular Results menu.

Exercise 8: Sensitivity Analysis


In this analysis, you will perform a design check using:

special pipe tubular properties


tapered design
high collapse casing with extreme collapse loading conditions

Exercise 9: Independent Exercise


This independent exercise designs a liner string.

Exercise 10: Template Exercise


This exercise shows basic steps to build a template.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-3

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 1: Reviewing/Creating the Data Hierarchy


1. Launch the StressCheck software (select Start > Programs >
Landmark Engineers Desktop 5000.1 > StressCheck).
2. Enter edm as the User ID and Landmark1 as the Password on the
login screen.

3. Import the file SC_Class.edm.xml.


4. From the Well Explorer, double-click (or right-click and select
Open from the right-click menu) to open Design E3S0P1. Select
the Normal (System) template.

9-4

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 2: Preferences and


Workspace Configuration
1. Create a new unit system called Oilfield API based on the API unit
system. Change the Oilfield API mud weight units to psi/ft. Select
the API unit system tab. What API unit is used for Force? Select the
API unit system as the Active Viewing Unit System.
2. Before proceeding, ensure the desktop preferences are set to show
the Detailed Wizard List, and display Depths as MD and Safety
Factors as Absolute values.
3. Create ten new tabs, and rename the existing default tab. Name the
tabs: Work, Schem, Path, Pore and Frac, Design, String and
Connection, Min ASF, Burst, Collapse, Axial, and Triaxial.
4. Assign views to the following tabs as follows:
Work: Leave as is.
Path: Wellbore > Wellpath Editor.
Pore and Frac: Split the pane vertically, then assign as follows:
Left pane: Wellbore > Pore Pressure
Right pane: Wellbore > Fracture Gradient
You will configure the other tabs later in the exercises.
5. Add additional bit sizes, if they do not already exist: 7, 8.25,
14.75, 33, and 42.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-5

Chapter 9: Exercises

6. Save and close the E3SOP1 Design.


Note
Throughout the remainder of the exercises, if a Change History dialog box appears,
click Save. Optional: to deactivate the display of the Change History Updates
dialog box:
1

Right-click the Database node ( ) in the Well Explorer.

Select Change History > Configure from the drop-down menu.

Select the Do not display change history update window check box.

Select this
check box to
disable the
display of the
Change
History
dialog box.
4

9-6

Alternatively, to turn off the Change History Updates dialog box, activate the
Do not show this message again check box in the lower left corner of the
dialog box. If you want to activate the Change History Updates dialog box
later, perform steps 1 through 3 above, but deselect the Do not display change
history update window check box.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 2 Answers
1. To create a new unit system called Oilfield API that is based on the
API unit system:
a) Select Tools > Unit System to open the Unit Systems Editor
dialog box.
b) Click New to open the New Unit System dialog box. Enter
Oilfield API as the name of the new unit system. Select API
from the Template pick-list to use the API unit set as the basis
for the new unit system, and then click OK to return to the Unit
Systems Editor dialog box.

Enter Oilfield API


as the Name of the
new unit system.

Click New to open the New Unit System


dialog box.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-7

Chapter 9: Exercises

c) Select Mud Weight from the Class list. Select psi/ft from the
Select Unit list. Do not click OK at this stage.

Select psi/ft
(psi per foot)
from the
Select Unit
list.

Select Mud
Weight from
the Class
column.

d) Select the API unit system tab. The Class unit Force displayed
that corresponds to the API unit system is lbf, while the Active
Viewing System is Oilfield API.

Select
Force
from the
Class
column.

9-8

Notice
that lbf is
the unit
assigned
to Force.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

e) Select API from the Active Viewing Unit System pick-list, and
then click OK.
Select API
from the Active
Viewing Unit
System
pick-list, and
then click OK.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-9

Chapter 9: Exercises

2. Make the required selections in the Tools > Options dialog box.

Select to display
depths as MD.

Select the Detailed


Wizard List check box.

Select to display the Absolute Safety


Factors.

9-10

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Select Tools > Tabs. Create new tabs, and then rename them
as specified.

Click New to create


tabs, and then click
Rename to specify the
name of each tab.

Click and drag this control to


view all the tabs (or use the
arrows at the left to scroll
tabs into view).

When complete, tabs


should appear at the
bottom of the main
window as specified.

4. Select the tabs listed below, and then assign views.


a) The Work tab is a working tab, and the contents will change
during the execution of the steps in each exercise.
Note
By default, the Well Schematic displays in all new tab panes.

b) Select the Path tab, and then select Wellbore >


Wellpath Editor.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-11

Chapter 9: Exercises

c) Select the Pore and Frac tab, and then split the tab in
vertical panes.

Double-click the vertical splitter bar located on the left of the


tab scroll controls.
Alternatively, drag the vertical splitter bar into position using
the mouse.

Click the title bar of each view (the active default view displays as
dark blue), and then assign the view with the following
menu commands:
Left pane: Wellbore > Pore Pressure
Right pane: Wellbore > Fracture Gradient

9-12

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Select Tools > Defaults > Bit Sizes. The default values you supply
are used to construct the drop-down list in the Casing Scheme
spreadsheets Hole Size cell. In general, you only use this feature to
add commonly used bit sizes. Click OK to apply any changes and
dismiss the dialog box.

6. Select File > Save to save the E3SOP1 Design, and then select
File > Close to close the Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-13

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 3: Reviewing/Specifying General Data


1. Open the E3SOP1 Design.
2. The Well depth is 16,330 ft MD. The Azimuth is 33 degrees. To
check the Well depth and azimuth, select Wellbore > General. You
can also access this dialog box using the Wizard.
3. Review and update the casing scheme by using Wellbore > Casing
and Tubing Scheme and the following data:
Note

Values for the Shoe Depth and Mud at Shoe are rounded up.

Values for the Top of Cement will be updated.

The 7 Production Casing will become a Production Liner; therefore, the


9 5/8 will be changed to Production Casing type.

OD(in) /Type/Name

Hole Size
(in)

Hanger
(ft)

Shoe (ft)

TOC (ft)

Mud at
Shoe (ppg)

30 Conductor Casing

36

30.0

600

430

8.6

24 Surface Casing

26

30.0

1,150

500

8.6

18 5/8 Intermediate Casing

22

30.0

3,030

1,660

9.2

16 Intermediate Casing

17.5

30.0

9,185

4,480

11.6

13 5/8 Protective Casing

14.750

30.0

12,020

8,315

14.0

9 5/8 Production Casing

12.25

30.0

14,620

10,750

15.1

7 Production Liner

8.5

14,320

16,330

14,320

11.0

4. Copy the pore pressure data from the Excel spreadsheet titled
porefrac.xls. Your instructor will provide this file. Insert the rows
above any existing rows in Wellbore > Pore Pressure with the data
provided in the Excel spreadsheet.
5. Copy the fracture gradient data from the Excel spreadsheet titled
porefrac.xls. Copy over any existing rows in Wellbore > Fracture
Gradient with the data provided in the Excel spreadsheet.

9-14

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Note
You can input either pressure or EMW and the StressCheck software
calculates the other. In the porefrac.xls spreadsheet, pressure is blank, and the
StressCheck software calculates the pore and frac pressure values based
on EMW.

6. Enter geothermal gradient values to specify the Wellbore


temperature. The surface ambient temperature is 80 degree F, the
mudline temperature is 40 degree F, and the temperature at TD is
250 degree F. Specify additional temperature data as follows:
200 degree F at 11,130 ft TVD
240 degree F at 12,630 ft TVD
7. Import Wellpath data from the file titled E3SOP1_Wellpath for
EDM training.txt. In what format must the file be prior to
importing it?
Hint
See StressCheck Help.

Review the wellpath data.


8. Specify the following bending dogleg in addition to any planned
dogleg severity. Enter 1/100 ft between 1,700 and 5,970 ft MD,
between 6,300 and 9,690 ft MD, and between 10,500 and
16,330 ft TD.
a) How can you specify this?
b) What is the Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides data
used for?
9. Select Wellbore > Production Data, and specify packer fluid and
placement. The Well is perforated at 16,100 ft MD with a packer at
15,200 ft MD. The completion fluid is water with a density of
8.6 ppg. Assume the Well will produce gas with a gradient of
0.1000 psi/ft.
What is the fluid gradient specific gravity?
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-15

Chapter 9: Exercises

10. Save the E3SOP1 Design.

9-16

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 3 Answers
1. In the Well Explorer, navigate to the E3S0 Well, and then
double-click on the E3SOP1 Design to open it.
2. Select Wellbore > General to specify the Well depth and azimuth.
The Well depth is 16,330 ft MD. The Azimuth is 33 degrees.
Note
Throughout the remainder of the exercises, click OK to apply changes and
dismiss the current dialog box.

3. Select Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme and enter


the following:

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-17

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. In the Excel spreadsheet, highlight the rows you want to copy and
press Ctrl-C. Select Wellbore > Pore Pressure, place the cursor in
the first row left cell, and then press Ctrl-V to paste the rows.

Click the upper left cell, and


then press Ctrl-V to paste the
pore pressure data.

9-18

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. In the Excel spreadsheet, highlight the rows you want to copy and
press Ctrl-C. Select Wellbore > Fracture Gradient, place the
cursor in the first row left cell, and then press Ctrl-V to paste
the rows.

Click the upper left cell, and


then press Ctrl-V to paste the
fracture gradient data.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-19

Chapter 9: Exercises

6. Select Wellbore > Geothermal Gradient.

Specify basic formation


temperature data.

Specify additional formation


temperature data. These
additional temperatures can
be used to characterize a
more complex formation
temperature profile or
seawater temperature profile.

9-20

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

7. Select Wellbore > Wellpath Editor, and then select File >
Import > Wellpath to open the Import Wellpath File dialog box.
Navigate to the location of the E3S0P1_Wellpath for EDM
training.txt file, select it, and then click Open. Review the
imported wellpath data.
Alternatively, you can copy and paste data into the Wellpath Editor.
The following rules associated with copy/paste of wellpath data can
be found in the Wellpath (Import) topic of StressCheck Help:
The file must be tabular delimited text that uses using any
combination of spaces, tabs, or commas as field delimiters.
Column 1 is reserved for measured depth, and measured depth
values must be in increasing order and positive values.
Column 2 is reserved for inclination.
Column 3 is reserved for azimuth, and azimuth values must be
0.0 AZ 360.0.
Note
EDM Data Transfer File imports are not supported from paths or file names
that contain apostrophes. Make sure you do not use apostrophes in file names
or directory names.

8. Select Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides to define intervals


of wellpath curvature independent of the deviation profile defined
in Wellbore > Wellpath Editor.

a) Dogleg overrides can be accomplished in two ways. One method


uses the Wellbore > Wellpath Editor, and the other method
uses the Wellbore > Dogleg Severity Overrides spreadsheet.
Do not enter the override in both places. To use the Wellpath
Editor, enter the override in the Max DLS column. Do not enter
the additional dogleg in the DLS column because the DLS
values describe the trajectory.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-21

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) This data is used in calculating bending stress as long as this


dogleg is greater than the dogleg due to bending indicated in the
Wellbore > Wellpath Editor and the calculated dogleg due
to buckling.
9. Select Wellbore > Production Data.

To determine the gas/oil gradient sg, select the Gas/Oil Gradient


option and press F4 to access the Convert Gas Gradient Units
dialog box.

Highlight the unit that you


want to momentarily
convert the unit value to.
Click OK to close the
dialog box.

10. Press Ctrl-S to save the E3SOP1 Design.

9-22

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 4: The Design Process


1. Select the 9 5/8 Production Casing to design.
2. Select Tubular > Design Parameters and specify the following for
each tab:
Design Factors Tab
Pipe Body
Burst

Connection
1.100

Burst/Leak

Axial

1.100
Axial

Tension

1.300

Tension

1.300

Compression

1.300

Compression

1.300

Collapse

1.000

Triaxial

1.250

Analysis Options Tab


Min Internal Drift Diameter

8.500

Single External Pressure Profile

Check box selected.

Temperature Deration

Check box selected.

Limit to Fracture at Shoe

Check box selected.

Buckling

Check box selected.

Use Burst Wall Thickness in Triaxial

Check box not selected.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-23

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Select the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and


Landing tab, and specify post-cementing hydrostatic profiles for
certain burst, collapse, and axial loads to include:
Mix-Water Density

8.33

Lead Slurry Density

15.20

Tail Slurry

Check box selected.

Tail Slurry Density

15.60

Tail Slurry Length

500

Displacement Fluid Density (1)

14.80

Float Collar Depth, MD

14,620

Applied Surface Pressure

Check box not selected.

Float Failed

Check box not selected.

Landing Data (Pickup and Slackoff


Force) (2)

(1)

14.8 ppg is used so the ECD does not exceed the fracture gradient while
displacing cement slurry.
(2)
Do not apply pickup or slackoff forces.

What is the initial Temperature Profile assumed for this string?

9-24

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. Select the Tubular > Burst Loads > Select tab, and specify the
following burst loads for the 9 5/8 string. Then, select the Edit tab
to specify the burst loads details (the pick-list in the Edit tab
controls which parameters are displayed). Use the default values
unless otherwise specified.
Internal Profile
Displacement to Gas

Influx Depth at section TD, 16,330 ft, Gas/Oil


Gradient, 0.1000 psi/ft, Fracture Margin of Error,
0.00 ppg, Mud/Gas Interface estimated at surface,
Mud Weight, 11.00 ppg

Gas Kick Profile

Influx depth at section TD, 50 bbl influx, with 0.5


ppg kick intensity, 11.0 ppg maximum mud weight,
0.7 kick gas gravity, 0 ppg fracture margin of error,
5 drill pipe, and 1,000 ft of 6.75 collars

Lost Returns with


Water

Leave as default

Green Cement
Pressure (Bump Plug)
Test

1,000 psi

Drill Ahead

Hanger Depth, 30 ft, TOC Depth, MD, 10,750 ft,


Shoe Depth, MD, 14,620 ft, MW Next Hole Section,
11.0 ppg, ECD, 0.30 ppg
Note: Click Yes if prompted to copy Drill Ahead
data from Burst to Collapse load.

Tubing Leak

Leave it as default

Injection Down
Casing

Injection Pressure, 5000.0 psi, Injection Density,


8.33 ppg

External Profile
Fluid Gradients w/
Pore Pressure
(External Profile)

Fluid Gradients w/ Pore Pressure, 8.33 ppg above


TOC (to analyze worst case) and 8.33 ppg below
TOC, Pore Pressure In Open Hole Below TOC
check box not selected

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-25

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Select the Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select tab, and specify the
following collapse loads for the 9 5/8 string. Then, select the Edit
tab to specify the collapse loads details (the pick-list in the Edit tab
controls which parameters are displayed). Use the default values
unless otherwise specified.
Internal Profile
Full/Partial
Evacuation

Default mud weight, and 9,000 ft mud level

Cementing

Use defaults

Lost Returns with


Mud Drop

Lost Returns Depth, 15,784.9 ft, Mud Weight,


11 ppg

Above/Below Packer

Pore Pressure at Perforation Depth, 3000 psi,


Density Above Packer, 8.60 ppg, Density Below
Packer, 2.0 ppg, Fluid Drop Above Packer check
box selected

Drill Ahead
(Collapse)

Hanger Depth, 30 ft, TOC Depth, MD, 10,750 ft,


Shoe Depth, MD, 14,620 ft, MW Next Hole Section,
11.0 ppg, ECD, 0.30 ppg

External Profile
Fluid Gradients w/
Pore Pressure

Fluid Gradient Above TOC, 15.10 ppg, Fluid


Gradient Below TOC, 15.10 ppg, Pore Pressure In
Open Hole Below TOC check box not selected.

6. Select Tubular > Axial Loads > Select tab, and then specify the
following axial loads:

9-26

Running in Hole - Avg Speed

3.00 ft/sec

Overpull Force

100,000 lbf

Pre-Cement Static Load Applied


Force

0 lbf

Post Cement Static Load

Check box selected

Green Cement Pressure Test

1,000 psi

Service Loads

Check box selected

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

7. Save and close the E3SOP1 Design.


What is the wellhead pressure for each load?
Hint
Select the View menu options.

What is the expected mud level (during Lost Return with Mud
Drop scenario)?
8. Perform a Graphical Design. Assume you want to use the same
casing weight and grade along the length of the entire string.
Hint
Display the Design Plots in the Design tab.

a) What pipe is initially selected?


b) Which Design mode (burst, collapse, axial, triaxial) is more
critical to the Design?
c) If you have some pipe inventories of 10,000 ft of 9 5/8,
53.5 ppf, L80 casing, LTC connection, could it be used for this
Well in combination with the initial solution?
How many feet of this pipe would you use otherwise?
Does the LTC connector satisfy the design criteria
(Design Factors)?
9. Select a VAM TOP from the Special Connection Inventory
(catalog). Does the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppg, L-80 VAM TOP string
connection satisfy the design criteria (Design Factors)?
10. Save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-27

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 4 Answers
1. Select Tubular > Current String to select the casing string to
design. Alternatively, select the string from the Wizard.

Select Tubular > Current


String, and then select
9 5/8 Production Casing.
- or Select 9 5/8 Production
Casing from the Select String
drop-down list.

2. Review Design parameters Design Factors and Analysis Options.

Coupling Design
factors use pipe
body Design factors
if coupling Design
factor fields
are empty.

9-28

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-29

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Select Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing


tab.
This data is specified on a per string basis.

Select the Tail Slurry


Density check box to
allow entry of tail
slurry data.

9-30

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select Tubular > Initial Conditions > Temperature tab.

Select the
Temperature tab to
view the initial
Temperature Profile
of the string.
The default values
correspond to the
undisturbed
Temperature Profile.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-31

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. Select Tubular > Burst Loads to designate burst loads for the
9 5/8 string.

A check box is
associated with
each load case you
want to use.
Details of each
load case are
specified by using
the Edit tab.

The selected External Profile will be used for all burst loads because
the Single External Pressure Profile check box is selected on the
Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab.

9-32

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the
Displacement
to Gas load
from the dropdown list, and
enter data as
specified to
define the load
case.

Select the Lost


Returns with
Water load from
the pull-down
list, and enter
data as
specified to
define the load
case.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-33

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the
Gas Kick
Profile load
from the dropdown list, and
enter data as
specified to
define the
load case.

Select the
Tubing Leak
load from the
drop-down list,
and review the
load case
values.

9-34

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the
Injection
Down Casing
load from the
drop-down
list, and enter
data as
specified to
define the
load case.

Select the
Green Cement
Pressure Test
load from the
drop-down list,
enter 1000 psi
Test Pressure,
and then review
the other load
case values.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-35

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Drill


Ahead (Burst)
load from the
drop-down list,
and enter data
as specified to
define the load
case.

Click Yes if
prompted to
copy Drill
Ahead data
from Burst
load to
Collapse
load.

Select the
Fluid
Gradients w/
Pore Pressure
load from the
drop-down list,
and review the
load case
values.
Click OK to
apply changes
and close the
dialog box.

9-36

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Select Tubular > Collapse Loads to designate collapse loads for


the 9 5/8 string.

Select the check


box associated
with each load
case you want to
use. Details of
each load case
are specified
using the Edit
tab.

Select the
Full/Partial
Evacuation
load case
from the dropdown list, and
enter data as
specified to
define the
load case.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-37

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the
Cementing load
from the dropdown list and
review the
default data for
this load case.

Select the
Lost Returns
with Mud
Drop load
from the dropdown list and
enter data as
specified to
define the load
case.

9-38

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the
Above/Below
Packer load from
the pull-down list,
and enter data as
specified to
define the load
case.

Select the Fluid


Gradients w/
Pore Pressure
load from the
drop-down list
and enter data
as specified to
define the load
case.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-39

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Drill


Ahead (Collapse)
load from the
drop-down list and
enter data as
specified to define
the load case.

Click OK to
apply changes
and close the
dialog box.

6. Specify the axial loads using Tubular > Axial Loads.

On the Select tab, select the


axial loads, and specify
values as shown.

Click OK to apply
changes and close
the dialog box.

7. Press Ctrl-S and then select File > Close to save and close the
E3SOP1 Design.

9-40

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select File > Open, select the E3SOP1 Design, and click OK.
Wellhead Pressures (psi) can be viewed using View > Tabular
Results > Burst Loads.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-41

Chapter 9: Exercises

To determine the mud level, refer to the Tubular > Collapse


Loads > Edit tab for Lost Returns with Mud Drop load case (see
page 9-38). The Mud Drop Level is 1,958.0 ft MD. This is the
measured depth level of mud required to balance the formation pore
pressure. (This mud drop is calculated by assuming the hydrostatic
column of mud in the hole equilibrates with a specified pore pressure
at a specified depth.)

The Lost
Returns with
Mud Drop load
displays 1958 ft
as the calculated
mud drop.

9-42

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

8. To perform the Graphical Design, divide the Design tab into four
panes (select Window > Split), and enable a simultaneous view of
multiple plots. Starting with top left to top right, then lower left to
lower right, select View > Design Plots > Burst, View > Design
Plots > Collapse, View > Design Plots > Axial, and View >
Design Plots > Triaxial. (Close the Well Explorer to maximize the
view area.)

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-43

Chapter 9: Exercises

Double-click any Design Plot pane background. A red line is drawn


in all plots. This red line represents the strongest 9 5/8 pipe in the
pipe inventory that satisfies the loading conditions.
To view the pipe rating and grade, place the cursor over the
Pipe Rating line, and click the left mouse button. The pipe
size, weight, and grade is displayed in the status bar.

To change the pipe weight, grade, or size, right-click the pipe


rating line you want to change. Drag the pipe rating line to the
desired position. When a pipe is changed in one plot, the change
is applied to the other plots.

9-44

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

a) Select the String and Connection tab, and split the tab into two
horizontal panes.
Hint
Double-click the horizontal splitter in the upper right corner of the main
view area, or drag the horizontal splitter bar to the desired location to
adjust the viewing area.

On the top pane, select Tubular > String Sections. On the


bottom pane, select Tubular > Connections.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-45

Chapter 9: Exercises

The top pane (String Sections table) displays the default pipe
selected, 9 5/8, 53.50 ppg, Q-125 grade, with a cost
of $437,116.
Double-click the small
bar in the upper-right
corner to split the
pane horizontally.

The Tubular > String


Sections spreadsheet
is automatically
entered.

From the bottom pane (Connections table), select BTC (Buttress


Connection) as the pipe connection Type, and then tab out of the
field. Notice that the total casing and connection cost increased
to $515,786.

The total cost of casing and tubing increased by


$78,670 when BTC type connectors are used.

b) The Collapse load controls the Design.


9-46

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

c) From the String and Connection tab, edit the String Sections
and Connections tables as follows:
Update the Tubular
> String Sections
and Tubular >
Connections
spreadsheets.

Notice that the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppg, L-80, LTC connection is under
designed for the specified design criteria. Connection Safety Factor
(Abs) = *1.25 (the asterisk indicates the Connection Safety Factor (Abs)
is less than the minimum Allowable Safety Factor (Design Factor).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-47

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Design tab. Notice that changes made in the String
and Connection tab are automatically applied to all Design
plots.
Notice that the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf, L-80
string section is under designed for both
Collapse and Triaxial loads.

9-48

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Min ASF tab. Select View > Tabular Results > Min
Safety Factors.

Notice that both connections


(LTC) Axial, jump out failure,
and pipebody
(9-5/8, 53.50 ppg. L-80)
Collapse, Triaxial under
design conditions are
flagged.
The legend at the bottom of
the table states that values
flagged with an asterisk
indicate the Safety Factor is
below the Design Factor.
The lowest Absolute Safety
Factor after comparing
connection and pipebody
absolute safety factors is
reported for any depth
of interest.
Connection absolute safety
factors are recognized by
the letter attached indicating
possible failure mode (for
example, L, F, J).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-49

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Design tab. On the Triaxial Design plot, drag the
horizontal line of the Pipe Yield Strength line upward until the
Design Load Line is to the left of the Pipe Yield Strength line as
shown below.
Drag the horizontal line of the Triaxial plot
Pipe Yield Strength Line. Notice that the
Collapse Design plot adjusts automatically
with the change.
You can drag any vertical/horizontal pipe
rating / yield strength lines.

9-50

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the String and Connection tab.

About 8,900 ft of L-80


pipe can be used.

Notice that the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppg, L-80, LTC connection is


still flagged as under designed for the specified design
criteria. Connection Safety Factor (Abs) = *1.25, which is
less than the Axial Tension Design Factor of 1.30.

9. Select the Work tab. Select Tubular > Special Connections


Inventory.
Select Edit > Import from Catalog, and then select VAM TOP
from the list of catalogs on the left side of the dialog box. With the
VAM TOP catalog selected, highlight (select) the VAM TOP, 9 5/8,
53.50 ppg, L-80 connector.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-51

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click Import to add it to the Special Connections table.


Select VAM
TOP special
connections
inventory
catalog.

Select
(highlight)
the VAM
TOP 9 5/8,
53.50 ppg,
L-80
connection
.
Click Import to add the connection to the Special Connections

Note
The red shading of the Special Connections listings indicates that there is no pipe
of the same size, weight, and grade in the Pipe Inventory.

Select the String and Connection tab. Replace the LTC connection
Type with VAM TOP.
Notice the Connection Safety Factor (Abs)
now satisfies the design loading conditions.

10. Click the Save icon (

9-52

) to save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 5: Minimum Cost


1. Set the Minimum Cost search parameters to look at the most
conservative constraints, where both Triaxial Design criteria and the
API Burst, Collapse, and Axial limits are not exceeded. Select one
casing section that has a minimum section length of 1,000 ft.
2. Change the Cost Factor for T-95 grade material to 1.60.
3. Execute the Minimum Cost search.
a) What pipes are selected by the minimum cost search?
b) Are these likely to be appropriate for your Design?
c) Select BTC connections. Is there any problem using the
BTC connection?
d) How would you verify in-house connection test data?
4. How much was saved on the cost compared to the initial Q-125,
BTC solution?
5. Save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-53

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 5 Answers
1. In the Tubular > Minimum Cost dialog box, enter parameters as
seen below, and then click OK. Refer to online help for further
information.

Select the Tubular >


Minimum Cost >
Parameters tab and enter
the following.

Select the Tubular >


Minimum Cost > Design
tab, and select areas (gray)
as seen here.

9-54

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

2. Select Tools > Default > Cost Factors. Change the T-95 grade cost
factor to 1.60, and then click OK.

Click the T-95 Cost


Factor field and change
the default to 1.60.

3. Select View > Design Plots > Minimum Cost.

a) Pipe selected is: 9 5/8 OD, 53.50 weight, P-110 grade.


Therefore, the minimum cost is obtained using P-110 grade pipe
for the 9 5/8 OD string.
Notice that the connector table inputs are reset to undefined after
executing Minimum Cost.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-55

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) Yes, based on the Design plots, all design load lines are to the left
of the pipe rating lines.

9-56

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Work tab, and then open the View > Triaxial
Check > Design Limits plot. Notice that all loads are within the
unibiaxial/triaxial limits.

c) Select the String and Connection tab. From the Connections


table Type pick-list, select BTC.

Select BTC as the


connection type.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-57

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Min ASF tab. Although the design satisfies the design
criteria, using BTC connections weakens the design because the
burst safety factor is connection critical, and the possibility of a
connection leak increases.

9-58

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

d) Select the Work tab, then select the View > Triaxial Check >
Design Limits plot. Right-click the plot and select In-House
Connection Test Data to open the Maximize dialog box.

Open the IN-HOUSE Connection TD.txt file. Press Ctrl-A to


select all the text, then press Ctrl-C to copy the content into the
Windows clipboard (see StressCheck Help for
more information).

Press Ctrl-A,
then press Ctrl-C
to copy the
contents of the
text file into the
Windows
clipboard.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-59

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the top left editable table cell on the Maximize dialog
box, then click Paste.

Click Paste to
add the
contents of the
Windows
clipboard into
the dialog box.

9-60

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click OK to apply the test data to the Design plot. You can then
compare the load distribution against the connection
test envelope.

Notice that Metal Seal is


added to the Design plot.

Note
In-House Connection Test data is not retained after a Design is closed.

4. The cost savings is $515,786 - $473,878 = $41,908.


5. Click the Save icon (

) to save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-61

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 6: Analyzing Results


1. Select the Schem tab, and split the tab into two horizontal panes. On
the top pane, select Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme. On the
bottom pane, select View > Well Schematic. Configure the Well
schematic to show the title, cement, tapered string, reference depths,
fluid, casing float shoes, the TOC for liners and casing strings, top
of the liner, and non-deviated. Change the title of the schematic to
StressCheck Training.
Hint
Use the right mouse button.

2. Split the Burst and Collapse tabs into four equal panes each.
Populate these panes (starting with top left to top right, then lower
left to lower right) with the View > Burst Plots and View >
Collapse Plots as follows: Differential Pressures, Load Line,
Pressure Profiles, and Temperature Profiles, respectively.
a) Which burst loads contribute to the burst load line?
What is the string temperature profile during the Displacement
to Gas scenario?
b) Which collapse loads contribute to the collapse load line?
3. Select the Axial tab and split the view into four panes (starting with
top left to top right, then lower left to lower right) with the View >
Axial Plots as follows: Load Profiles - Apparent
(w/Bending), Load Line, Service Load Profiles - Apparent
w/Bending, and Service Load Lines.
a) Which load cases and axial force directions
(tension/compression) contribute to the service load line
throughout the Well?
4. Split the Triaxial tab into four equal panes. Populate these panes
(starting with top left to top right, then lower left to lower right)
with the View > Triaxial Check plots as follows: Load Line,
Safety Factors, Design Limits, and Von Misses Equivalent Plot.

9-62

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Momentarily, do not include the effect of temperature on yield


strength, and the effect of buckling, in your Design.
Hint
Apply these changes while viewing the Design plots.

a) Do you need to change your Design?


b) Check both temperature deration and buckling prior to saving
the Design.
6. Save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-63

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 6 Answers
1. Split the pane and apply views as seen below. Right-click on the
Well Schematic to access the Well Schematic Properties dialog
box. In the Well Schematic Properties dialog box, select the items
to display on the schematic, then click OK.

Right-click the
Schematic, and
then select
Properties.

Change the Title name, then


select the check boxes
associated with the items
you want displayed on the
Well Schematic.
This dialog box is also
accessible via the Edit >
Properties menu path.

9-64

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Click OK to view the


changes to the
schematic.

Chapter 9: Exercises

2. On the Burst and Collapse tabs, split the panes and apply views as
seen below. Refer to the plots on the Burst and Collapse tabs to
determine the loads that define the burst and collapse load lines.
Note
If a plot legend covers most of the viewing area, right-click an empty area on
each graph, and then select Properties from the drop-down menu. On the
Graph tab of the dialog box, deselect the Show Legend check box to see all
plot data.

a) The Burst Load Line plot is based on the Displacement to Gas


and Tubing Leak burst loads.
The Burst Load Line plot is a compilation of burst differential pressure curves. In this case,
the burst load line is a compilation of the Displacement to Gas and Tubing Leak load lines.

The assumed string temperature profile during Displacement to


Gas scenario shows a typical temperature profile, with lower
temperature at the mid/lower casing section, and higher
temperature in the mid/upper casing section, compared to the
undisturbed temperature profile.
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-65

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) The Collapse Load Line plot is based on the Lost Returns with
Mud Drop, Full/Partial Evacuation, and Above/Below Packer
collapse loads.

The Collapse Load Line plot is a compilation of


collapse differential pressure curves. In this case,
the collapse load line is a compilation of the Lost
Returns with Mud Drop, Full/Partial Evacuation,
and Above/Below Packer load lines.

9-66

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. On the Axial tab, split the panes, and apply views as seen below.
Tensile/Compressive
axial loads display

The Service Load line draws over


the Lost Returns with Water and
the Above/Below Packer loads.

All axial service loads are displayed in absolute


values to facilitate identification of the maximum
loads, including Lost Returns with Water, Injection
Down Casing, and Above/Below Packer.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-67

Chapter 9: Exercises

a) The service load line is positive (Tension), down to


approximately 7,000 ft MD due to the Lost Returns with Water
and Injection Down Casing axial load component. The Service
Load line becomes negative (Compression) down to
approximately 10,500 ft MD due to the Above/Below Packer
axial load component, and finally it shifts back to positive down
to TD due to Lost Return with Water and Injection Down Casing
axial load component.

Service Loads line

9-68

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. Split the Triaxial tab into four panes, and place one plot in each
pane as shown below.

In the Design plot, the Von Mises


and the API failure criteria plot
together. The Von Mises plot
envelope in this case is
approximate. Consequently,
sometimes failure points plot
inside the envelope.

The Von Mises Equivalent Stress plot is


totally pressure independent; that is, the
strength of steel does not depend on the
hydrostatic pressure.

Note: Always validate your visual


interpretations with tabular results,
as well as with the Von Mises
equivalent stress.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-69

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Select the Tubular > Design Parameters > Analysis Options tab,
and deselect the Temperature Deration and Buckling check
boxes.
Hint
You can select and deselect the temperature deration and buckling check
boxes, click Apply, and then observe the effect on the plots.

When finished, verify Temperature Deration and Buckling


options are selected in the Tubular > Design Parameters >
Analysis Options tab and then click OK.

Deselect the
Temperature
Deration and
Buckling analysis
options.

a) No, deselecting temperature deration and buckling makes the


design criteria less critical.

9-70

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Notice that Collapse Load shifts slightly away from the design
limit (Triaxial Safety Factors). Similarly, the Above/Below
Packer Load shifts slightly upward on the Von Mises plot.
Collapse load shifts slightly right, away
from the design limit (Failure Criteria).

Above/Below Packer shifts slightly upward


(within the envelope), away from the unibiaxial
collapse limit.
Note
It is always recommended to support any graphical interpretation with tabular
results. It is also recommended to verify Design Parameter settings prior to reaching
design conclusions.

6. Select the String and Connection tab, then click the Save
icon ( ) to save the E3SOP1 Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-71

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 7: Tables and Reports


1. Using the Print Preview feature (available if you have printer drivers
set up on your PC), investigate the options for printing results from
the desktop.
2. What is the minimum burst absolute safety factor for the
9 5/8 casing?
Be sure to select casing 9 5/8 53.50 ppf, P-110. Verify the BTC
Connection Type (P-110 Grade) is specified in the
Connections table.
3. What is the minimum triaxial absolute safety factor for
9 5/8 casing, and what is the minimum triaxial normalized safety
factor? What is the ratio (Abs/Norm) between these values? Why?
4. What are the four minimum absolute safety factors at the top
of cement?
Hint
Look at both free and cemented pipe at the TOC. Determine the TOC using
Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme and/or View > Well Schematic.)

5. At what depth is wear most critical for burst and collapse? What is
the maximum allowable wear at this depth?
6. What overpull could you pull if the casing became stuck at
14,000 ft MD while running in? What would be the axial absolute
safety factor if this overpull was applied?
7. What is the axial force at the wellhead when the casing
is cemented?
8. Which load case results in the minimum collapse absolute safety
factor? At what depth does this occur?
9. Which load case(s) indicate buckling conditions?
How can reported buckling conditions be prevented in the design?
10. What are the pipe ratings for the casing?

9-72

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

11. Set up a new report, and name the report Wellbore Data. Select the
Portrait format with multiple items on each page. Select Print
Preview (if available) to display the report on your screen. Include
the following items in the order presented:

General Data
Well Schematic
Casing and Tubing Scheme Data
Pore Pressure Data
Fracture Gradient Data
Pore, Fracture & MW Plot
Deviation Data
Geothermal Gradient Data

12. Save and close Design E3SOP1.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-73

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 7 Answers
1. Select File > Print Preview. When finished, click Close.
Select what you want to print from the drop-down list.

9-74

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

2. On the String and Connection tab, verify BTC is specified in the


Type drop-down list in the Connections table.
Verify the connection type BTC is specified as the connection Type.

Select the Work tab, and then select View > Tabular Results >
String Summary.
The minimum absolute burst
safety factor for the top
section is 1.51 L (that is, the
L denotes that the design
is connection (leak) critical).

3. Click the Normalized SF icon (

The absolute Triaxial safety


factor is 1.60.

).

Notice that the minimum Triaxial Normalized safety factor is 1.28.

The ratio between the absolute and normalized safety factors is 1.25
because the Normalized SF = Absolute SF/Design Factor
(1.60/1.28). You can verify that 1.25 is the specified Design factor
(Tubular > Design Parameters > Design Factors tab).
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-75

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. Select the Schem tab and view the Casing and Tubing Scheme table
or the Schematic. Notice that TOC = 10,750 ft MD.
TOC for 9 5/8 Production
Casing is 10,750 ft.

Select the Work tab, and then select View > Tabular Results > Min
Safety Factors. Make sure you view absolute safety factors.
Make sure you view the
absolute safety factors. Click
the Normalized SF icon again
(
) before selecting the
Minimum Safety Factor table.

Burst minimum absolute


safety factor is 1.58.

Collapse minimum absolute


safety factor is 1.17.
Axial minimum absolute
safety factor is 3.15.
Triaxial minimum absolute
safety factor is 1.85.

9-76

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. From the Work tab, select View > Tabular Results > Max
Allowable Wear table.

The max allowable wear is most


critical for burst at TD, with a
rating of 37.6% maximum wear
(% of wall thickness).

The max allowable wear is most


critical for collapse at TD, with a
rating of 1.1% maximum wear (% of
wall thickness).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-77

Chapter 9: Exercises

6. From the Work tab, select View > Tabular Results > Max
Allowable Overpull. The axial SF is the Design safety factor of
1.3. The Axial Design safety factor is specified on the Tubular >
Design Parameters > Design Factors tab.

The maximum
overpull at
14,000 ft MD is
761,107 lbf.

7. From the Work tab, select View > Tabular Results > Axial Loads.
The axial force at the wellhead when the casing is
cemented is approximately 500 kips.

9-78

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

8. From the Work tab, select View > Tabular Results > Minimum
Safety Factors.

Use this key to determine which codes


are associated with each load case.

The minimum absolute collapse


safety factor results from the
Above/Below Packer load case
and is 1.03 at 14,620 ft TD.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-79

Chapter 9: Exercises

9. From the Work tab, select View > Tabular Results >
Triaxial Results.

From the Load pick-list, check all loads. (This pick-list is only
available when the Triaxial Results table or a custom load is
displayed and active.)

With the Triaxial Result table in view, select


from the Load pick-list to check all loads.

9-80

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

The Tubing Leak load triaxial results


reports a buckled pipe length of
9,883 ft, and additional pickup to
prevent buckling of 321,957 lbf.

The Above/Below Packer load triaxial


results reports buckling conditions as well.
High delta temperature is the primary
reason that causes the buckling condition in
combination with high internal pressure.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-81

Chapter 9: Exercises

Momentarily, with the Triaxial Results for Tubing Leak displayed,


select the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing
tab. Select the Pickup Force option, and then enter a pickup force
the reported pickup force to prevent buckling during tubing leak
event. Click Apply, then notice the buckling condition for this
scenario is removed.
With the Triaxial Results table active, select Tubing Leak
from the Loads pick-list.

From the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing dialog box, select the
Pickup Force option, and then enter a pickup force of 321957 lbf.
Click Apply to see the buckling condition removed.

9-82

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

From the Tubular > Initial Conditions > Cementing and Landing
tab, reset the Pickup Force to 0 lbf. Click OK to dismiss the Initial
Conditions dialog box and return to the Triaxial Results table.

Reset the
pickup force to
0 lbf.

10. From the String and Connection tab, select either the String
Sections or Connections spreadsheet, and then highlight a row or
click in a cell on the row. Click the Ratings icon ( ) on the
toolbar (or select Tubular > Ratings) to open the Ratings
dialog box.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-83

Chapter 9: Exercises

11. Select Tools > Reports.

Click New, and then


click Rename to
create a report titled
Wellbore Data.

Select the Contents tab, and then click


Add to display the Add Contents
dialog box. Select the items you want
to add to the report. Standard Windows
controls for multiple selections are
available (mouse select with Shift or
Ctrl keys). Click OK when you are
finished selecting items. Use the Up
and Down buttons to order the
contents.

Indicate that you want


Multiple Items Per
Page, data for the
Current String only,
and Portrait format.

9-84

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select File > Print Preview.


Select the Wellbore Data report from the drop-down list. In the example
below, the second page (Well Schematic) is shown. Familiarize yourself
with the report controls.

12. Press Ctrl-S, and then select File > Close to save and close
the Design.
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-85

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 8: Sensitivity Analysis


In this exercise, you will perform the following design checks with
sensitivity analysis of:

Special pipe tubular properties


Taper string casing configuration
High collapse casing exposed to a high collapse loading condition

Special Pipe Tubular Properties


In this analysis, you will perform a design check using special pipe
tubular properties applied to a corrosive environment (CO2 service).
Corrosion is a major problem in gas fields with CO2 for production
strings. 13 CR as a stainless steel material is available for these types
of conditions.
1. Open planned Design E3S0P1. Save the Design as E3S0P1_13CR.
2. Define a temperature deration schedule named 13 CR. Specify the
deration of the materials yield strength as follows:

9-86

Temperature DF

Correction Factor

77.0

1.00

122.0

0.98

212.0

0.94

302.0

0.92

392.0

0.89

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Define a new material named 13 CR, and then enter the following
material mechanical properties for this new material:
Material Name

13 CR

Young's Modulus (psi)

29,000,000

Poisson's Ratio

0.29

Density (lbm/ft3)

490

Expansion Coefficient (E-06/F)

6.1

* Temperature Schedule Name: 13 CR


* StressCheck version 5000.x and beyond has modified the association to the
Temperature deration schedule. It will be defined at the Grade table instead
of the Material table. Also, both anisotropic yield columns (radial and
hoop) will be displayed in the Grade table.

4. Define a new Grade named VM 110 13 CRSS. Enter the following


casing/tubing physical properties:
Grade or Name

VM 110 13 CRSS

Yield (psi)

110,000

UTS (psi)

110,000

Material

13 CR

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-87

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Define a Pipe using grade VM 110 13 CRSS. Enter the following


pipe properties:

9-88

OD (in)

9.625

Weight (ppf)

53.5

Grade

VM 110 13 CRSS

ID (in)

8.535

Min Int Drift Dia (in)

8.5

Pipe Type

Standard

Burst (psi)

10,900 (calculated API)

Collapse (psi)

7,950 (calculated API)

Axial (lbf)

1,710,000 (calculated API)

UTS (psi)

110,000

Wall Thickness (% of Nom.)

87.5

Plain End Cost ($/ft)

Default

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

6. Define a connection named VAM SLIJ-II. Enter the following


connection properties:
Pipe Body OD (in)

9.625

Pipe Body Weight (ppf)

53.5

Pipe Body Grade

VM 110 13 CRSS

Connection Type

Other

Seal Type

MM

Connection OD (in

9.855

Burst (psi)

10,900

Tension (lbf)

1,275,000

Compression (lbf)

1,045,500

Max bending (degree/100 ft)

30

$/Cost

Default

7. Redefine the string section to use instead a 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf,


VM 110 13 CRSS casing:
Top, MD (ft)

30

Base, MD (ft)

14,620

OD (in)

9 5/8

Weight (ppf)

53.500

Grade

VM 110 13 CRSS

8. Redefine the connection selected for 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf,


VM 110 13 CRSS. Instead, select the VAM SLIJ-II connection.
9. Observe:
a) Does the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf, VM 110 13 CRSS, VAM SLIJ-II
satisfy the design criteria?
b) Do buckling conditions change as a consequence of applying
different tubular properties?

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-89

Chapter 9: Exercises

10. How can the new design tubular properties be shared at the Well
Explorer Tubular Properties level?
11. Close the E3S0P1_13CR Design.

9-90

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 8 Answers: Special Pipe Tubular Properties


1. Open Design E3S0P1. Select File > Save As, and then save the
Design with a new name, E3S0P1_13CR.
2. Select the Work tab, select Tubular > Tubular Properties >
Temperature Deration, and enter the following temperature
deration schedule for 13 CR:
Enter five temperature
deration points for 13 CR.

Note
StressCheck 2003.16.1+ version series implemented the ability to define tubular
properties within the application as an option in the Tubular menu. Other versions
(2003.16.0, 2003.21) only allow definition of tubular properties from the
Well Explorer.
StressCheck version 5000.1 (and later) will support the 2003.16.1+
implementation.

3. Select Tubular > Tubular Properties > Materials, and then enter
the following 13 CR material mechanical properties:

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-91

Chapter 9: Exercises

4. Select Tubular > Tubular Properties > Grades, and then enter the
following VM 110 13 CRSS Grade Properties:

Enter the new grade.

9-92

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

5. Select Tubular > Pipe Inventory, and then enter the following pipe
using VM 110 13 CRSS Grade:

Enter the new pipe with the


grade you created in the
previous step.

6. Select Tubular > Special Connections Inventory, and then enter


the following VAM SLIJ-II Connection properties:

Enter the new special


connection.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-93

Chapter 9: Exercises

7. Select Tubular > String Sections, and then redefine the casing
string as follows:

Assign the new


VM 110 13 CRSS grade you
created earlier to the string
section.

After selecting a new Grade, refresh the material assigned for the
grade selected. Select Tubular > Tubular Properties > Grades,
and then reselect the 13 CR material from the pick-list.

Reselect the
13 CR material,
then tab out of
the cell to
refresh the
changes made
in system
memory.

9-94

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

8. Select Tubular > Connections, and then select the VAM SLIJ-II
connector as follows:

Assign the new connection type to the pipe


section, then tab out of the cell.

9. Observe the following:


a) Select View > Tabular Results > Min Safety Factors.

Notice that the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf, VM 110 13 CRSS,


VAM SLIJ-II casing passed the design check. None of the
reported absolute safety factors has exceeded the design factors.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-95

Chapter 9: Exercises

Burst safety factors are not connection critical (leak) anymore.


However, you need to be cautious because the lowest known
VAM SLIJ-II connection burst rating input is 10,900 psi, which
is much higher than the initially applied BTC API Leak
connection calculated rating of 9,160.8 psi.
The Axial Safety factors are now connection critical (this is
expected because of the near flush connection type applied).
b) Select View > Tabular Results > Triaxial Results,
Tubing Leak.

The Additional Pick up to Prevent buckling and Buckled Length


initial values have changed (reduced) because of the different
mechanical properties of the VM 110 13 CRSS grade compared
to steel.
10. To share tubular properties at the Well Explorer Catalogs level,
perform the following:
Select the Work tab, and then select Tubular > Tubular
Properties > Grades.

9-96

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select Edit > Export to Catalog, and then select the VM 110 13
CRSS grade. Click the arrow button ( ) to add the new grade to the
Well Explorer Tubular Properties. Click Close to dismiss the dialog
box, and then press Ctrl-S to save the Design and apply the change.

Select the
grade from the
inventory, then
click the arrow
button to
transfer the
grade to the
Catalog.

When the grade is exported to the Well Explorer Tubular Properties


Grade table, the associated material and temperature deration data is
transferred to the corresponding Well Explorer tubular
properties tables.
The ability to export grades to catalogs is dependent on the locked
or unlocked status of the grade, material, and/or temperature
deration. You cannot export a grade with any associated tubular
properties locked.
From the Well Explorer, double-click the Grades node (
the Grade table.

) to view

If the Locked check box


is selected on the
Grade, Material, or
Temperature Deration
table, you cannot export
Grades to the Catalog. If
it is locked, a small lock
appears on the Well
Explorer tubular
property ( ).

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-97

Chapter 9: Exercises

Notice that the Locked check box is not selected. The


VM 110 13 CRSS grade has been exported, and the section type has
been properly defined.
Deselecting the Locked
check box allows export to the
catalog.

The export grade to catalog operation is also conditioned to User


rights (see the Application Security Tokens topic in EDM
Administration Utility Help).
Note
When new pipes defined in the Design pipe inventory table are exported to
catalogs, the associated grade, material, and temperature deration are checked
against the Well Explorer tubular properties. If the grade, material, or
temperature deration exist in the Well Explorer Tubular Properties, only the
pipe is exported to avoid duplicate tubular properties.
If the grade, material, or temperature deration do not exist, then the pipe,
grade, material, and temperature deration are exported.

11. Select File > Close to close the E3SOP1_13 CR Design. Click Yes
if prompted, Save changes to E3S0P1_13 CR*?

9-98

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Taper String Design Check


In this analysis, you will perform a design check using a taper string
casing configuration. Taper string casing configurations are often used
in a design (for example, tapered casing configurations can solve
clearance issues in the production annulus when running
completion tools).
1. Open planned Design E3S0P1. Save the Design as E3S0P1_Taper.
2. Create a 10 3/4 casing with a BTC connector, 9 7/8, 62.80 ppf,
P-110, 8.625 ID, VAM TOP taper string. The 10 3/4 string
section length should be 1,000 ft.
a) What is the lowest 10 3/4 weight and grade API pipe that
satisfies the initial design criteria (loads analysis options and
design factors) for the upper section?
b) What design load mode drives the 10 3/4 casing weight and
grade solution?
c) Which is the most critical to the solutionthe selected
10 3/4 pipe or 10 3/4 BTC connection?
3. Close the E3S0P1_Taper Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-99

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 8 Answers: Taper String Design Check


1. Open Design E3S0P1. Select File > Save As, and then save the
Design with a new name, E3S0P1_Taper.
2. From the Work tab, update the contents of the String/Connection,
Casing and Tubing configuration and pipe inventory tables
as follows:
Select Tubular > String Sections, then remove current contents
(that is, select the data row, and then press Delete to empty
the table).

Select Tubular > Pipe Inventory.


Select All from the pipe size pick-list.
Select All from the pipe
size pick-list.

9-100

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the first row, then select Edit > Insert Row. Enter the
following: 9 7/8, 62.80 ppf, P-110, 8.625 ID pipe information.

Select Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme. Select


9 7/8 production Casing OD instead of current 9 5/8.

Select Tubular > Special Connections Inventory.


Select Edit > Import from Catalog, and then select VAM TOP
from the list of catalogs on the left side of the dialog box. With
the VAM TOP catalog selected, highlight (select) the VAM TOP,
9 7/8, 62.80 ppg, P-110 connector.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-101

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click Import to add it to the Special Connections table.


Select VAM
TOP special
connections
inventory
catalog.

Select
(highlight)
the VAM
TOP 9 7/
8,
62.80 ppg,
P-110
connection
.

Click Import to add the connection to the


Special Connections Inventory table.

Select the String and Connection tab, and then define the upper
section of 10 3/4 pipe OD, 1,000 ft length. Initially pick the
highest weight and grade, and then assign a BTC connector.
Select the 9 7/8, 62.8 ppf, P-110, pipe for the bottom section,
and then assign a VAM TOP connector. Change the weight and
grade for the 10 3/4 pipe section until the lowest safety factor is
obtained for this section.
After these steps are completed, select View > Tabular Results
> Min Safety Factors, View > Design Plots and View >
Triaxial Check > Safety Factors to review the effect of the
change.
Note
The StressCheck software does not perform minimum cost design of
Tapered Strings.

9-102

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Compare your selection with the selection shown below


(10 3/4, 51.0 ppf, C-95, BTC).

a) Select the Min ASF tab to view the minimum safety factors
(absolute) table.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-103

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Design tab to view the design plots.

9-104

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Triaxial tab to view the triaxial plots. To view the
second string section design limits plot, right-click the Design
Limits - Section 1 plot and select Load/Section Selection from
the drop-down menu. Select the Sections tab in the Properties
dialog box that displays. Click OK to view Section 2. You may
need to right-click on the plot again, and select Resize to view
the plot in the reduced split-screen viewing area.

Right-click on the Design Limits - Section 1 plot, and select Load/Section Selection from the dropdown menu. Click the Sections tab on the Properties dialog box that displays.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-105

Chapter 9: Exercises

Repeat the string section selection process on the Von Mises


Equivalent Stress plot, and select Section 2.

You may need to right-click on the plot again, and select


Resize to view the plot in the reduced split-screen
viewing area.

9-106

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) Apparently the Axial load design mode.


c) Select the Work tab, and then select the View > Tabular
Results > String Summary table.

The 10 3/4 BTC connection Axial Safety Factor (Abs) is the


most critical condition to the taper design.

3. Select File > Close to close the E3S0P1_Taper Design. Click Yes
when prompted to Save changes to E3S0P1_Taper*?

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-107

Chapter 9: Exercises

High Collapse Casing


In this analysis, you will perform a design check using a high collapse
casing exposed to a high collapse loading condition.
1. Open planned Design E3S0P1. Save the Design as E3S0P1_HC.
2. Define a new pipe 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf, P-110HC, and enter the
following properties:

9-108

OD (in)

9.625

Weight (ppf)

53.5

Grade

P-110HC

ID (in)

8.535

Min Int Drift Dia (in)

8.5

Pipe Type

Special

Burst (psi)

10900 (Calculated API)

Collapse (psi)

10550 (Special, high collapse)

Axial (lbf)

1710113 (calculated API)

UTS

125,000

Wall Thickness (% of Nom.)

87.5

Plain End Cost ($/ft)

Default

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Define the following VAM SLIJ-II connection for the high


collapse pipe:
Pipe Body OD (in)

9.625

Pipe Body Weight (ppf)

53.5

Pipe Body Grade

P-110HC

Connection Type

Other

Seal Type

MM

Connection OD (in)

9.855

Burst (psi)

10,900

Tension (lbf)

1,275,000

Compression (lbf)

1,045,500

Max bending (degree/100 ft)

30

$/Cost

Default

4. Apply the new high collapse casing and connection associated to


the design.
5. Does the new design tolerate a Full Evacuation scenario during
production under Geothermal temperature conditions?
6. Close the E3S0P1_HC Design.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-109

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 8 Answers: High Collapse Casing


1. Open Design E3S0P1, select File > Save As, and save the Design
with a new name, E3S0P1_HC.
2. In the Work tab, perform the following.
a) Select Tubular > Tubular Properties > Grades, and then enter
the following grade:

Create a new Grade


named P-110HC.

b) Select Tubular > Pipe Inventory and enter the following high
collapse pipe information:
Notice after entering the special pipe, the StressCheck software
sorts the new row according to its weight, grade, and ID.

9-110

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

3. Select Tubular > Special Connections Inventory and enter the


following connection information:

4. Perform the following:


a) Select Tubular > String Sections and apply the high
collapse pipe.

Select P-110HC as the new


grade for the string section.

b) Select Tubular > Connections and apply the VAM SLIJ


connection to the 9 5/8, 53.50 ppf, P-110HC pipe.

Select VAM SLIJ-II as the new


connection for the pipe section.

5. Yes, the new Design tolerates a Full Evacuation scenario during


production under geothermal temperature conditions.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-111

Chapter 9: Exercises

a) Select the Full Evacuation Production Loads check box on the


Tubular > Collapse Loads > Select tab.

Select the Full


Evacuation check
box.

Select the Temperature tab, select Full Evacuation, and then


select the Geothermal temperature option.
From the
Temperature tab,
select Full
Evacuation.
Select the
Geothermal
option.

Click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box.

9-112

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) Select View > Tabular Results > Minimum Safety Factors.


Notice that all safety factors (including collapse safety factors)
satisfy the design criteria. The full evacuation load case is
critical at the bottom of the high collapse 9 5/8 casing.

6. Select File > Close to close the E3S0P1_HC Design. Click Yes
when prompted to Save changes to E3S0P1_HC*?
StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-113

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 9: Independent Exercise


1. Design the 7 Production Liner. Use the same applicable loads
(burst, collapse, axial) as applied to the associated production casing
for the E3SOP1 Design.
2. What is the grade, weight, and connection recommended for the
liner that satisfies the design criteria (default design factors)?

9-114

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 10: Template Exercise


StressCheck Templates allow users to load recurring common data
when creating Designs. Templates contain a combination of views,
design criteria, and inventories settings. Once a template is assigned to
a new Design, the assigned initial template cannot be replaced with
another template.
1. Create a new template document called My Template from the
Normal (System) Template in the StressCheck software.
a) Add a new 9 7/8 OD pipe, 62.80 ppf, P-110, 8 5/8 ID to the
default API pipe inventory.
b) Increase the Legend default font size to 12.
c) Rename the default tab1 tab to Work, and add a new tab named
Well Schematic.
d) Predefine a Production casing string, design parameters. Use all
default design factors for pipe and connection, except the pipe
burst design factor. Instead, enter 1.2 rather than the 1.1
default value.
Apply temperature deration and buckling as additional
analysis options.
Define the following Loads: for burst (Tubing Leak internal
profile, and Fluids Gradient w/Pore pressure external profile; for
Collapse, Gas Migration internal profile and Mud and Cement
Mix Water external profile and for Axial, Overpull with
100,000 lbf and Service Loads).
Define one section, 1,000 ft minimum section length, and apply
default uni-biaxial boundaries except for the burst compression
combine load (apply triaxial boundary) for the minimum
cost Analysis.
e) Save the template as a users template.
f) Apply the My Template document to a new instant Design. How
can you confirm the template settings are currently applied to the
new Design?

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-115

Chapter 9: Exercises

Exercise 10 Answers
1. Launch the StressCheck software, and then select File > Template >
Open From Database.

From the File menu, select


Template > Open From
Database.

Open the Normal


(System) template.

a) Select Tubular > Pipe Inventory. Select All from the pipe size

9-116

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

pick-list, and then enter a new pipe OD.

Right-click the first


row to highlight,
and then select
Insert Row to add
a new row.

Enter 9 7/8 OD
pipe, 62.80 ppf,
P-110, 8 5/8 ID.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-117

Chapter 9: Exercises

b) Select Tools > Options, and then select the Legend check box.
Click the legend Font button, and then update the font size to 12.
Click OK, then click OK to apply the changes and close the
Options dialog box.

Select Tools > Options,


and then select the
Legend check box.
Click the Font button.

Enter 12, then click


OK to apply
the change.

9-118

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

c) Select Tools > Tabs. Rename Tab1 to Work.

Click Rename, then enter the


new tab name, Work.

Click New to add another tab, and then click Rename to name
the new tab Well Schematic. Click Close to dismiss the
dialog box.

Click New to create another


tab.

Click Rename, and then enter


the new tab name,
Well Schematic.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-119

Chapter 9: Exercises

d) Select Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme.


Notice that only two columns are available: Name and Type. You
can define all strings and string type combinations typically used
in field operations. After the string(s) are defined, you can define
design parameters and loads per each string type according to
your Company Design Criteria policy.
For example, define a string Production Casing.
Select Production
from the Name
pick-list, and
Casing from the
Type pick-list.

Select Tubular > Design Parameters, and then redefine the


burst safety factor as 1.2 instead of 1.1. Apply default values for
all other design factors, and select Temperature Deration and
Buckling as Analysis Options.

9-120

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click OK to apply the changes.

Enter 1.2 as the Burst


safety factor.

Select the Temperature


Deration and Buckling
Analysis Options
check boxes.

Select Tubular > Burst Loads. Select Tubing Leak as the burst
internal profile, and select Fluid Gradients w/ Pore Pressure as
the external profile.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-121

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Select the Tubing Leak


internal profile check box.

Select the Fluid Gradient


w/ Pore Pressure
external profile option.

Select Tubular > Collapse Loads. Select Gas Migration as the


production load internal profile, and select Mud and Cement
Mix-Water as the external profile.
Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

Select the Gas


Migration production
load internal profile
check box.
Select the Mud and
Cement Mix-Water
external profile option.

9-122

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select Tubular > Axial Loads, and then select Overpull Force.
Apply 100,000 lbf as the default axial force, and then select
Service Loads.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Select the Overpull check


box, and then enter
100000 lbf.

Select the Service Loads


check box.

Select Tubular > Minimum Cost, and define minimum cost


constraints as follows: Maximum Number of Sections = 1,
Minimum Section Length = 1,000 ft. Select the Design tab on
the dialog box, and then apply the following design
envelope criteria.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-123

Chapter 9: Exercises

Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.

Enter 1 as the Maximum


Number of Sections.
Enter 1000 ft as the
Minimum Section Length.

Select the Design tab,


and then apply the
design envelope criteria
as shown.

9-124

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

While in Template mode, check the contents of the Wellbore


and Tubular menus. Grayed out menu commands, and Well
specific data (for example, Geothermal Gradient and Production
Data), are not accessible in Template mode.

Grayed out menu commands


are not available in
Template mode.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-125

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select the Work tab, and then select View > Well Schematic.

e) Select File > Template > Save As. Enter My Template in the
Template Name field, and then click OK.
Enter My Template as
the new template name.

Notice the recently created template was added as a User


Defined Template in the Well Explorer.

The newly created template


now exists in the Well
Explorer tree under the User
Defined Templates node.

Select File > Close to close the template.

9-126

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

f) Select File > New > Instant Design, accept the defaults, and
then click OK to create an instant Design.

When the Open Template dialog box appears, select My


Template as the template to apply to the Design.
Click OK to apply the template to the instant Design.

Observe that the newly created Design with My Template


applied includes all changes that you made in template.

By default, the new Design displays both the currently


displayed Work tab and the Well Schematic tab.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-127

Chapter 9: Exercises

Select Tubular > Pipe Inventory. The pipe inventory


includes the 9 7/8 casing created in My Template.

Select Wellbore > General, and then enter a well depth


MD. For example, enter 10,000 ft.

Select Wellbore > Casing and Tubing Scheme, and enter a


Production casing string.

Select Tubular > Design Parameters > Design Factors tab,


Tubular > Burst Loads, Tubular > Collapse Loads, Tubular
> Axial Loads, and Tubular > Minimum Cost.

9-128

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Chapter 9: Exercises

Notice that all changes made in My Template are assigned to


the current instant Design. The example below shows the burst
safety factor of 1.2 entered previously in My Template.

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

9-129

Chapter 9: Exercises

9-130

StressCheckTM Software Release 5000.1.13 Training Manual

Anda mungkin juga menyukai